JP2016026844A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine characterized in a display.SOLUTION: A Pachinko machine 100 according to the present invention includes a decoration symbol display device 208, and a sub display device 808. The decoration symbol display device 208 is installed inside a performance device 206 and fixed thereto. The sub display device 808 is fixed to a performance movable body 806 that is movable within a display-screen front plane of the decoration symbol display device 208. When a lower tray fullness error display 703 displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 808 come into an overlapped state when viewed from a player, the visibility of the lower tray fullness error display 703 is lowered.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), an enclosed game machine (enclosed pachinko machine), and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a game machine that can perform display on a display means (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, the conventional game stand has room for improvement in display.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a display characteristic.

The above purpose is
Display means;
Movable means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a dish full tank error display,
The movable means is a means movable to a second position;
The second position is a position in front of the display means;
A portion of the movable means located in the second position overlaps at least a portion of the dish full tank error display;
This is achieved by a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a display characteristic.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part of pachinko machine 100 by a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) is an example of a decorative symbol, and (d) is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) shows the flow of the image control process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the example of the display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, the example of the display aspect of a hold icon, and the example of the stop display aspect of a decoration symbol. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and the example of a structure of the determination button 136a and selection button 136b, 136c. It is a figure which shows the example of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and an effect movable body. It is a figure which shows the example of the display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, operation | movement of the shielding apparatus 246, and operation | movement of an effect movable body. It is a figure which shows the example of a structure of the transparent plate member 118 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the display of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and the audio | voice output from the speaker 120. FIG. The first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and the shielding capable of shielding the first display and the second display. It is a figure which shows the example of the relationship with a means. The first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and the shielding capable of shielding the first display and the second display. It is a figure which shows the example of the relationship with a means. The first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, and the shielding capable of shielding the first display and the second display. It is a figure which shows the example of the relationship with a means. It is a figure which shows the example of the 1st display displayed on the screen of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, and the 2nd display in time series. It is a figure which shows the specific example 1 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific example 2 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific example 5 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific example 6 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the specific example 7 of the effect performed with the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a disassembled perspective view of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 with which the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention is equipped, the decoration part 810, the light-guide plate 812, and the decoration part 814. It is the schematic diagram which looked at the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 with which the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-1 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention is equipped, the decoration part 810, the light-guide plate 812, and the decoration part 814 from the player side. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-2 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2-2 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the concrete effect in the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3-1 of the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a table explaining the alerting alert | report which can be displayed in the image display area of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. In a state in which a special figure variable game is being executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, a state in which a big hit game is being executed, or a state in which neither a special figure variable game nor a big hit game is being executed It is a figure which shows the example of a display of various alerting | reporting effects. In a state in which a special figure variable game is being executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, a state in which a big hit game is being executed, or a state in which neither a special figure variable game nor a big hit game is being executed It is a figure which shows Example 3-2 of various alerting | reporting effects. In a state in which a special figure variable game is being executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, a state in which a big hit game is being executed, or a state in which neither a special figure variable game nor a big hit game is being executed It is a figure which shows Example 3-3 of various alerting | reporting effects. In a state in which a special figure variable game is being executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, a state in which a big hit game is being executed, or a state in which neither a special figure variable game nor a big hit game is being executed It is a figure which shows Example 3-4 of various alerting effects. In a state in which a special figure variable game is being executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment of the present invention, a state in which a big hit game is being executed, or a state in which neither a special figure variable game nor a big hit game is being executed It is a figure which shows Example 3-5 of various alerting effects. It is a figure explaining the example in which the visibility of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 changes in the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the example in which the visibility of the display in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 changes in the pachinko machine 100 by the 3rd Embodiment of this invention.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that is attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray includes an upper plate 126 that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter may be simply referred to as “balls”) and is provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player A ball launching handle 134 that is launched into the game area 124 of 200, a chance button 136 that changes the performance mode of various performance devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by a player's operation, and a chance button 136 A chance button lamp 138, a ball lending operation button 140 for instructing the card unit (CR unit) to lend a ball, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a player A ball rental display unit 144 for displaying the balance of the card and the state of the card unit. In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is displayed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout controller 600 (see FIG. 4). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process, and the first control process related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls are configured, and the error is canceled by the operation of the game store clerk. A payout board case 172 that houses a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168, and a launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of a game ball are configured. A launch board case 176 for housing the launch board 174, a power control unit 660 for supplying power to various electrical gaming machines, and a power switch 178 for turning the power on and off by the operation of a game shop clerk and being operated when the power is turned on. Accordingly, a power board case 184 that houses a power board 182 that includes an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main controller 300, and a CR interface 186 that sends and receives signals between the payout controller 600 and the card unit. And are arranged.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially at the center, and around the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the normal symbol display device 210, and the first symbol display device 210. A special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, a normal symbol holding lamp 216, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games that are on hold (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, up to a predetermined number (for example, two) of general-purpose variable games. It is possible to hold. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, 4). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances such as a general prize opening 226, a general figure start opening 228, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, and a variable prize opening around the rendering device 206. 234.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize balls”) and balls lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “rental balls”). May be included).

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the game board 200 includes One is arranged on the left side. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew). In the present embodiment, only one special opening 2 is provided directly below the special figure 1 starting port 230. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a big winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is arranged below the center of the game board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be freely opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special symbol display device stops and displays the big hit symbol when the special symbol variable game is won. In this case, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148, and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Special Figure 1 Start Port 230, Special Figure 2 Start Port 232) Wins the Out Port 240 without winning any of the winning ports or start ports, or just passing through the normal start port 228 To do.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a front stage 244 are disposed in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is disposed in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230.

  In this embodiment, the production movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b that imitate the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and includes an upper arm motor (not shown) that rotates the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at the position of the elbow is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 performs the game ball launch control, and the power supply control unit 660 controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high A driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, the blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232, the door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and a shielding device sensor 430. A sensor circuit 428 that outputs a detection signal from the chance button sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and image data stored in the ROM 406 is read based on a signal from the CPU 404, and a display image is displayed using the work area of the VRAM 436. VDP (video) that generates and displays an image on the decorative symbol display device 208 It is connected with your display processor) 434, a.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5A to 5C, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of a special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5 (a) shows ten types of special drawings "Special Figure A" to "Special Figure J" as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on. “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that have a relatively high degree of advantage over the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  "Special figure E" is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change or latent probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  “Special figure G” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure H” is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit with no short time at 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, which is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  When notifying 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” or 15R big jackpot of “Special Figure B”, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “Decoration 1− (Decoration 1 -decoration 1 "," decoration 2 -decoration 2 -decoration 2 ", etc.) are stopped and displayed. When the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A” is explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7”). -Decoration 7 "etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R big hit called “hidden probability change” of “special drawing E”, the 2R big hit called “special drawing F” suddenly normal, or the first small hit of “special drawing G”, “special drawing H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify 2R jackpot called “sudden probability change” of “special drawing C” or 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction of“ special drawing D ”,“ decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5 ”is set. Stop display. On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 5B are stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG.5 (c) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG.5 (c), the white part in a figure shows the location of the segment which light-extinguishes, and the black-colored part has shown the location of the segment which lights up.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), the data is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, three initial value generations for generating the initial values of the three random number counters for generating the normal winning random number value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value respectively. The random number counter for use and the two random number counters for generating each of the random number value for determining the usual figure variation time and the random value for determining the special figure fluctuation time are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 2 starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. It is determined that there was. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Three random number counters for generating one random value and one special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a normal winning random value has made one round next, in addition to setting the random number counter for generating a winning random value Keep it. In addition to the initial value storage area described above for determining that the random number counter for generating a random number for generating a regular figure has made one round next, a random number counter for generating a special figure 1 random value and a special figure 2 random value The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the generation random number counters has made one round. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228 and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. One random value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value group having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  If a win is received at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained as a normal figure winning random number value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Are stored in the corresponding ordinary random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the general symbol display device 210 performs a fixed display of either the winning symbol (normal symbol A) or the off symbol (normal symbol B). Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  On the other hand, if the result of the usual figure variation game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variation game is out of place, the usual figure hit flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is not in operation), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the result of the usual figure variation game is won or not by the random lottery based on the usual figure winning random number value stored in the above random number value storage area. Make a hit judgment. In the case of winning, the flag for the usual figure provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON, and in the case of not winning, the flag for the usual figure is set to OFF. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the random time value for determining the normal fluctuation time described above is acquired as the random value for determining the normal fluctuation time, and the acquired normal fluctuation time is determined. Based on the random number value, one time for displaying the variable map on the general map display device 210 is selected from a plurality of variable times, and this variable display time is set as a normal map variable display time in the RAM 308. Store in the variable time storage area. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the general figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending general figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. Flags such as a probability variation flag are prepared. These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R jackpot flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation Special flag A, 15R big hit flag is on, special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, special figure B, 2R big hit If the flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure C, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is on When the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure E, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, Figure probability fluctuation flag Special figure F when the first small hit flag is on, special figure G when the first small hit flag is on, special figure H when the second small hit flag is on, special figure H when the first small hit flag is on In FIG. I, when the second off-flag is on, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the state of each special figure J is set. Is set to indicate that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure A), a 15R big jackpot symbol (special figure B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special figure C), and a sudden short time symbol (special figure D). ), Hidden probability variation (special E), sudden normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special I) ) And the second off-set symbol (special symbol J).

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Further, in the case of a game machine of the number cut probability variation type (ST type), if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number and the subtraction is performed. When the result changes from 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag is turned off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for holding the member 234a in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is provided. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that is started at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member 234a is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in the present embodiment), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, in order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed, the effect is displayed in the storage area of the effect waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Information indicating the waiting period is set. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. If the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, a predetermined probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the jackpot game (ST type). in the case of).

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used to determine whether to make a big hit, a small hit, or a loss (win / no decision). Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above explanation, the special figure 2 variable game is started with priority over the special figure 1 variable game, and the special figure 2 priority change is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. The special figure 1 variable game is started with priority over the special figure 2 variable game, and the special figure 1 hold is a priority figure change that is consumed in preference to the special figure 2 hold. May be. In addition, the priority opening variation which starts the special drawing variable game related to the suspension of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 in the starting opening winning order without giving priority to any of the special drawing 2 floating game and the special drawing 1 floating game. It may be. In the starting entry winning order fluctuation, for example, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and therefore the priority fluctuation that the upper limit number of the hold is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the substantial number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are configured with command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off are included in the command data. In the case of the symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the number of the flag, the special figure probability fluctuation flag value, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process In the case of a winning effect start command and an end effect start command, including the values of the 1 small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off flag, the special figure probability variation flag, etc., the special figure probability Including the value of the fluctuation flag, etc. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, include the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the number of jackpot rounds, etc. That. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the special figure 2 starting port 232, presence / absence of winning at the variable winning port 234, etc. including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the 15R big hit flag, the 2R big hit flag, the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the first off flag, the second off are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the flag, the value of the special figure probability fluctuation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held, etc. Set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, 15R big hit flag, 2R big hit flag, first small hit flag, second small hit flag, first lost flag, second lost flag, stored in the RAM 308 as command data, Information indicating the value of the special figure probability variation flag is set.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door opening error or a lower pan full error is detected, device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is included in the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved as a return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  Next, processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. FIG. 8A is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 8A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 8B is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 8C is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 8D is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 9A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 9B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 9C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes an operation request notifying unit capable of executing at least an operation request notification requesting a player for a predetermined operation (an example of notification of information for prompting operation of the operation unit), and an operation request notification unit. Operating means (an example of means controlled by the second control of the notification control means) capable of executing at least an operation that makes it difficult for the player to recognize at least part or all of the operation request notification. Hereinafter, each example of the operation request notification requesting the player for a predetermined operation and the operation that makes it difficult for the player to recognize at least part or all of the operation request notification will be described. Note that the operation request notification may directly indicate that a predetermined operation is requested, or may not indicate directly. For example, when something (for example, part or all of the effect) changes by performing a predetermined operation in a state where the predetermined notification is being performed, the predetermined notification is included in the operation request notification.

  FIG. 10A shows an example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 10A, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the upper left of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Here, in FIG. 10A and each figure to be described later, the variation of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is represented by a downward thick arrow. On the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, there are provided a fourth symbol display area 208e capable of displaying the fourth symbol and a special symbol hold number display area 208f for displaying the number of special figure variable games held in numbers. Yes. In this example, a black circle indicating that the special figure is changing is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “3” indicating that the special figure 1 variable game has three hold numbers is displayed.

  FIG. 10B shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 10B, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located in the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A black circle is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e located in the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “3” is displayed in the special figure reservation number display area 208f. Below the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 700 capable of displaying a variation icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, and a left side of the variation icon display area 700 are displayed. Special figure 1 hold icon display area 701 capable of displaying the same number of hold icons (for example, circular images) and variable icon display area 700 are located to the right of the number of holds, and the same number as that of special figure 2 variable games. And a special figure 2 hold icon display area 702 capable of displaying the hold icon. In this example, the fluctuation icon is not displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 700, three hold icons are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 701, and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 702 is displayed. The hold icon is not displayed. In this example, while the number of holds is displayed in the special figure hold number display area 208f, the number of hold is also displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 701.

  FIG. 10C shows an example of the display mode of the hold icon. As shown in the upper part of FIG. 10C, a mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed may be displayed in the hold icon. The mark that suggests pressing the chance button 136 includes, for example, a button image representing the chance button 136 and a downward arrow image representing the pressing operation of the chance button 136. The display of the hold icon including such a mark corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is pressed while the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon or another hold icon is “eight”, “price” as shown in the lower part of FIG. ”,“ General ”,“ Military ”4 characters are written at equal intervals (90 ° intervals) in the circumferential direction of the circle, or a mode that matches the pattern of a predetermined character (for example, Sabohani, Bancho, etc.) You may make it change to the various aspects of. The mode may be changed by pressing the chance button 136 may be the hold icon (a hold icon including a mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed), or other hold icons other than the hold icon. There may be only the holding icon concerned.

  FIG.10 (d) has shown the example of the stop display mode of a decoration symbol. As shown in FIG. 10D, the decorative design may be displayed in a form in which a mark suggesting pressing of the chance button 136 is displayed. The mark that suggests pressing of the chance button 136 includes, for example, the characters “PUSH”, a button image indicating the chance button 136, and a downward arrow image indicating the pressing operation of the chance button 136. The stop display of the decorative design including such a mark corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. In addition, although the symbol of “decoration 2” is illustrated in FIG. 10D, any symbol of “decoration 1”, “decoration 3” to “decoration 10” may be used. For example, if the decorative symbol that stops first among the three decorative symbols that are variably displayed is stopped and displayed in the manner shown in FIG. 10D, when the chance button 136 is pressed by the player, Transition. Further, for example, the decorative symbols that stop at the first to third are stopped and displayed in the manner as shown in FIG. 10D, and the chance button 136 is pressed by the player each time the display is stopped. When success or failure is determined by lottery every time 136 is pressed, if all succeeds, a special SP reach or special mode is entered. Further, for example, when any of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a manner as shown in FIG. 10D, if the chance button 136 is pressed in that state, it is executed when the chance button 136 is normally pressed. The action to be performed (for example, the action at the time of pressing the chance button mentioned in the example described above or below) may be executed. Further, for example, when the chance button 136 is operated in the state where the upper hold icon in FIG. 10C and the decorative symbol in FIG. 11 are displayed at the same time, the button operation is invalid for the hold icon (for example, reaction Do not perform a predetermined presentation) may be effective (for example, react, perform a predetermined presentation), may be valid for the hold icon, may be invalid for the decoration, It may be invalid for both icons and decorative symbols, or may be valid for both reserved icons and decorative symbols. When the button operation is valid for one side and invalid for the other, the invalid side may be made valid after performing the production of the valid side based on the button operation.

  FIG. 10E shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 10 (e), a message “→ right strike →” suggesting a right strike is displayed at the top of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This message is displayed, for example, to suggest how to hit the player during probability change. Such a message display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to make a right turn. This message may be displayed again as a warning display, for example, when a winning is made at a general drawing start opening provided on the left side or a special figure 1 starting opening that is awarded only when left-handed.

  FIG. 10F shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 10 (f), a message “← left-handed ←” indicating left-handed is displayed at the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This message is displayed, for example, when the probability change (electric support) is completed, in order to suggest the player how to hit. Such a message display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to make a left strike.

  FIG. 10G shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 10 (g), a message “Return to left-handed” is displayed at the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, which suggests returning to left-handed. This message is displayed when, for example, the player has left-handed in the gaming state to be left-handed (for example, the game ball has passed through the normal start opening provided in the right-handed route after shifting to the gaming state to be left-handed) ) Is displayed as a warning. Such a message display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to make a left strike.

  FIG. 10H shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 10 (h), a message “↑ Aim for Chance Attacker” is displayed at the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, which suggests that the variable winning opening 234 is aimed. This message is displayed, for example, on a game table that produces an effect using a ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 in an initial round in a big hit game or a small hit game. Such a message display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to launch a game ball aiming at the variable winning opening 234.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B show another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 11A, a message indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 together with the message “Yoshimune wa ...” (part of the tutorial display). ing. This display indicates to the player that the continuation of the tutorial display is displayed by pressing the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 11B, the continuation of the tutorial display “I am an eight great general” is displayed. The message “Yoshimune is ...” and the mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed correspond to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136.

  FIG. 11C shows an example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the big hit game. As shown in FIG. 11C, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” selected is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the upper left of the screen of the ornamental symbol display device 208 ( The display of the symbol combination itself may be information indicating the profitability of the jackpot). In the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “˜Big hit” is displayed to notify that the big hit game is being played. Also, the decorative symbol display device 208 includes numerical values relating to effects during the big hit game, such as the current round number of the big hit game (in this example, “10R”) and the number of enemies defeated during the retreat. Defeated "), the number of prize balls acquired during the retreat (" 28314pt "in this example), etc. are displayed. These displays correspond to an operation request notification for requesting the player to launch a game ball aiming at the variable winning opening 234. For example, when one game ball enters the 15 variable prize openings 234, the number of prize balls displayed is “15” as the number of prize balls obtained and the number of prize balls entered into the variable prize opening 234. It may be “14” (= 15−1), which is the difference (net profit) from the lost number of balls “1”, or “15” of the number of winning balls.

  In addition, a message “please remove the sphere” is displayed on the left side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This message is displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132.

  FIG. 11D shows an example of a demonstration display of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 11 (d), the symbol combination “decoration 2—decoration 8—decoration 0” for notifying the deviation is displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the ornamental symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display area 208e displays a white circle indicating that the special figure variable game has ended, and the special figure hold number display area 208f indicates that the special figure variable game hold number is zero. The number “0” is displayed. In other words, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol display area 208e, and the special figure hold number display area 208f indicate that this game machine is an empty board. These displays may correspond to an operation request notification requesting the next player to start a game operation.

  In addition, on the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “~ waiting for customers” is displayed to notify that this game machine is an empty board (during demonstration). It should be noted that the display indicating that it is an empty board does not necessarily have to be clearly indicated by a text message as in this example, and it may be understood that a demonstration is being performed by displaying the background of the screen. Moreover, it is only necessary to know that the symbol is stopped even if it is not known that the demonstration is in progress. These displays may correspond to an operation request notification requesting the next player to start a game operation.

  Further, on the right side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed together with a message “Daitomo is here”. This display suggests to the player that the screen relating to the membership service is displayed when the chance button 136 is pressed. This display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136.

  FIGS. 11E and 11F show another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 11 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 has a mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed, together with a princess character line (part of the tutorial display) that “A reach is expected to develop”. Is displayed. This display suggests to the player that when the chance button 136 is pressed, the lines of other characters responding to the lines of the princess character (continuous tutorial display) are displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 11 (f), a line of a samurai character “appears that the chance is up due to the appearance of a samurai” is displayed. The display of the mark of the princess character's lines and the suggestion of pressing the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 11E corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136.

  11 (g) and 11 (h) show another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 11G, a message “˜A stage˜” notifying that the present stage is the A stage is displayed at the top of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, on the right side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message indicating that the chance button 136 has been pressed is displayed together with a message “if you want to change”. The message “if you want to change” and the mark that suggests pressing the chance button 136 are displayed in a state where the stage can be changed (for example, immediately after the start of change), and are produced by pressing the chance button 136. This suggests to the player that the stage can be switched from stage A to another stage. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 11 (h), the production stage is switched from the A stage to the B stage, and a message displayed at the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208 is “~”. "A stage ~" is switched to "~ B stage ~". Further, if the stage can be changed even after the production stage is switched to the B stage, a message “if you want to change” and a press of the chance button 136 are indicated on the right side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. And are displayed. This display indicates to the player that the stage is switched from the B stage to another stage by pressing the chance button 136. The message “if you want to change” and the mark that suggests pressing the chance button 136 correspond to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136.

  FIG. 12A shows a determination button 136a and a selection button 136b that can be provided in the pachinko machine 100 as a push button type switch that can be pressed by the player instead of or in addition to the chance button 136. An example of the configuration of 136c is shown. As shown in FIG. 12A, the determination button 136a has a circular planar shape. The left selection button 136b for selecting the left (or top) has a planar shape that suggests "left" (for example, an isosceles triangular shape with an apex angle on the left side, a left arrow shape), It is arranged on the left side of the determination button 136a. The right selection button 136c for selecting the right (or lower) has a planar shape (for example, a shape symmetrical to the left selection button 136b) suggesting "right", and is arranged on the right side of the decision button 136a. Yes.

  FIGS. 12B and 12C show examples of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the pachinko machine 100 provided with the buttons 136a to 136c shown in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 12 (b), as in FIG. 11 (g), the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is referred to as “˜A stage˜” informing that the current stage is the A stage. A message is displayed. Further, a mark indicating that the right selection button 136c is pressed is displayed along with a message “A stage” on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The message “A stage” and a mark indicating that the right selection button 136c is pressed are displayed in a state where the stage can be changed. When the right selection button 136c is pressed, the stage is changed from the A stage. This suggests that the player can switch to the stage. When the right selection button 136c is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 12C, the production stage is switched from the A stage to the B stage, and a message displayed at the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is “ "~ A stage ~" switches to "~ B stage ~". Further, if the stage can be changed even after the production stage is switched to the B stage, the message “B stage” and the left selection button 136b are pressed to the right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. And are displayed. This display indicates to the player that the stage is returned from the B stage to the original A stage by pressing the left selection button 136b. These messages “A stage” and “B stage” and a mark suggesting that the left selection button 136b or the right selection button 136c is pressed are operations for requesting the player to press the left selection button 136b or the right selection button 136c. Corresponds to request notification. The operation request notifications shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C are similar to the operation request notifications shown in FIGS. 11G and 11H, but the operation request notifications before the button press shown in FIG. And the operation request notification after the button press shown in FIG. 11 (h) is the same mode, the operation request notification before the button press shown in FIG. 12 (b) and the button shown in FIG. 12 (c). The mode is different from the operation request notification after pressing. In addition, a type in which three stages A, B, and C (or four or more stages) can be cyclically shifted, such as A⇔B⇔C⇔A, may be used. In this case, in the operation request notification shown in FIGS. 12B and 12C, both a mark that suggests pressing the left selection button 136b and a mark that suggests pressing the right selection button 136c are displayed. Also good.

  Also, for example, in a gaming machine provided with two chance buttons, a predetermined reaction is shown when the second chance button is pressed while an operation request notification requesting the pressing of the first chance button is made. It may be.

  FIG. 12D shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 12D, a button image imitating the chance button 136 and a meter moving image representing a meter are displayed at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The meter moving image has, for example, a horizontally long rectangular shape, and is white as a whole at the beginning of the moving image, and the black portion gradually increases from the left end with the passage of time. These button images and meter moving images do not explicitly indicate that the chance button 136 is pressed, but those skilled in the art or a player may recognize that these images are black as a whole. It can be recognized that this implies that the chance button 136 should be pressed before becoming. Therefore, the display of these button images and meter moving images corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. As described above, the operation request notification includes not only notification that explicitly requests a predetermined operation but also all notifications that enable a person skilled in the art or a player to recognize that the predetermined operation is prompted. The notification implying that the chance button 136 should be pressed may include a countdown display such as 3 → 2 → 1 → 0.

  FIG. 12E shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 12 (e), a message “Yoshimune mode” is displayed in the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the current effect mode is the Yoshimune mode. The number “3” is displayed in the upper part of the special figure hold number display area 208f, and the number “4” is displayed in the lower part. This display informs that the number of hold of special figure 1 variable game is 3, and the number of hold of special figure 2 variable game is 4. Below the special figure hold number display area 208f, the remaining number of fluctuations (for example, the remaining number of fluctuations for a short time, the number of remaining fluctuations for the probability change in the ST machine, etc.) related to a state advantageous to the player is displayed (this example). Then, “70 times remaining”). This display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to launch a game ball (entering the start opening).

  12 (f) and 12 (g) show another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. As shown in FIG. 12 (f), above the variation icon display area 700 of the decorative symbol display device 208, there is a spear character image and a message “Chance of Yoshimune if the family crest stops” as a spear character line. It is displayed. These are displayed as effects related to normal fluctuations, and suggest that a predetermined chance time starts when a “family crest” symbol is stopped and displayed in roulette, which will be described later. These samurai character images and messages correspond to operation request notifications for requesting the player to launch a game ball (entering the start opening).

  As shown in FIG. 12 (g), with respect to the hold that is won at the time of the normal figure and at the time of the opening of the electric long, a special animation effect is produced in or around the fluctuation icon display area 700 before and after the hold is consumed. Done. For example, when the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 won at the time of the opening of the electric tulong is moved from the special figure 2 hold icon display area 702 to the variable icon display area 700 (when the hold is digested), the decorative symbol is displayed. Apart from the variation display, rotation of the roulette in the variation icon display area 700 (the variation display of the effect symbol) is started. When the roulette stops after the elapse of a predetermined time, one of a plurality of types of effect symbols is displayed in the variation icon display area 700. Thereafter, various effects are executed based on the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the variation icon display area 700. In the example shown in FIG. 12 (g), the hold icon corresponding to the hold shown in FIG. 2 moves to the variable icon display area 700 and the rotation of the roulette is started. , “Thousand boxes” symbol moves toward the top of the screen. Such an operation of the “thousand box” symbol (in this example, the movement of the display position) is an operation that is executed by digesting the increased holding due to the entrance to the special symbol start opening, so that an operation request notification ( For example, it corresponds to an operation request related operation related to notification for requesting the launch of a game ball. When the “thousand box” symbol moves upward on the screen, the “thousand box” symbol temporarily overlaps the character image. Therefore, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the operation request notification (display of the habit character image) due to the operation request related operation (movement of the display position of the “thousand boxes” symbol).

  FIG. 12 (h) shows an example of a demonstration display of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 12 (h), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 0” for notifying the deviation is displayed. The fourth symbol display area 208e displays a white circle indicating that the special figure variable game has ended, and the special figure hold number display area 208f indicates that the special figure variable game hold number is zero. The number “0” is displayed. In other words, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol display area 208e, and the special figure hold number display area 208f indicate that this game machine is an empty board. These displays may correspond to an operation request notification requesting the next player to start a game operation.

  In addition, on the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “~ waiting for customers” is displayed to notify that this game machine is an empty board (during demonstration). This display may correspond to an operation request notification requesting the next player to start a game operation.

  In addition, a message “menu display with button PUSH” is displayed in telop below the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This display indicates to the player that a menu screen (for example, a screen related to the membership service) is displayed by pressing the chance button 136. This display corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. In addition, the menu screen displayed based on pressing of the chance button 136 may be displayed overlapping with various information displayed on the screen. Such display of the menu screen may correspond to an operation in which at least part of the operation request notification is difficult for the player to recognize.

  FIGS. 13A and 13B show examples of the decorative symbol display device 208 and an effect movable body (movable accessory) provided around it. In the example shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, effect movable bodies 800 and 802 are provided around the decorative symbol display device 208 in addition to the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 3. The effect movable bodies 224, 800, and 802 operate in a predetermined operation pattern when, for example, a predetermined effect lottery is won. In the following description, “overlapping” and “non-overlapping” are as viewed from the player side.

  The forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 of this example can be rotated by a stepping motor in a plane substantially parallel to the screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The forearm portion 224b does not overlap the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where the forearm portion 224b is in one movable end position (for example, an initial position or a standby position) (see FIG. 13A). Further, the forearm portion 224b overlaps a part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where the forearm portion 224b is at the other movable end position (for example, the maximum movable end position or the effect position) (see FIG. 13B). ).

  The effect movable body 800 includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The effect movable body 800 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the screen. The effect movable body 800 is located above the upper end of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where it is in the upper movable end position, and does not overlap the screen (see FIG. 13A). Further, the effect movable body 800 overlaps with a part of the upper part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state where the effect movable body 800 is at the lower movable end position (see FIG. 13B). In this example, when the effect movable body 800 is in the lower movable end position, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fourth symbol display area 208e, the special figure reservation number display area 208f, etc. of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. The movable body 800 is shielded and cannot be visually recognized. However, the fourth symbol display area 208e may be always visible regardless of the position of the effect movable body 800.

  The effect movable body 802 has a shape imitating a panda. The effect movable body 802 is movable in the vertical direction in a plane substantially parallel to the screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by being driven by a stepping motor (not shown). In this example, a horizontal stage (not shown) having the same height as the lower end of the screen is provided in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The stage is provided with an opening that allows the movable movable body 802 to move in the vertical direction. In the state where the production movable body 802 is at the lower movable end position, only a part (in this example, the panda's head) is exposed on the stage, and the other parts (in this example, the panda's trunk, limbs, etc.) It is stored below the stage (see FIG. 13A). Further, in this state, a part of the effect movable body 802 on the stage is overlapped with a part below the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Other portions of the effect movable body 802 stored below the stage cannot be visually recognized by the player.

  In addition, the effect movable body 802 appears almost on the stage in the state of the upper movable end position (see FIG. 13B). In this state, almost the entire effect movable body 802 overlaps with a part of the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the effect movable body 802 is overlapped with the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 at any position. For example, in the state where it is at the lower movable end position, the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is. It may not be overlapped.

  Here, as shown in part A of FIG. 13B, the effect movable body 800 at the lower movable end position and the effect movable body 802 at the upper movable end position are not in contact with each other. Yes. Therefore, the effect movable bodies 800 and 802 do not contact each other regardless of the position. On the other hand, as shown in part B of FIG. 13B, the effect movable body 800 at the lower movable end position and the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 at the other movable end position are in contact with each other. For this reason, the effect data defining the operation pattern of these effect movable bodies is designed so that the effect movable body 800 and the forearm portion 224b do not reach these positions at the same time.

  When the effect movable bodies 224, 800, and 802 are moved or rotated to a position overlapping the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the screen may not be visible. Therefore, the movement or rotation of the effect movable bodies 224, 800, 802 to the position overlapping the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult for the player to recognize at least a part of the operation request notification on the decorative symbol display device 208. May correspond to the operation.

  14A to 14C show examples of display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and operation of the shielding device 246. FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 14A, the shielding device 246 is in a fully opened state, and the entire screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the upper left of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A black circle is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e located at the lower right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “3” is displayed in the special figure reservation number display area 208f. On the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed. This message is displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132.

  In the state shown in FIG. 14B, the shielding device 246 is in a fully closed state, and the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is only partially visible through the lattice holes of the shielding device 246. This makes it difficult for the decorative symbol display device 208 to change the decorative symbol and the message “please remove the ball”. The shielding device 246 (right door 246b) of this example has an opening at a position corresponding to the fourth symbol display area 208e and the special figure reservation number display area 208f (or only the fourth symbol display area 208e) in the fully closed state. 246c is provided. Thereby, even if the shielding device 246 is in the fully closed state, the fourth symbol display area 208e and the special figure reservation number display area 208f (or only the fourth symbol display area 208e) are visible.

  When the shielding device 246 is in the fully closed state, the display mode on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be different from the normal mode. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 14C, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and / or moved as necessary, so that the decorative symbols can be easily removed from the lattice holes of the shielding device 246 (left door 246a). Visible. Note that when the door has finished moving, the state is as shown in FIG. 14B or 14C, but the decorative symbol or message may be more difficult to see while the door is moving.

  The closing operation of the shielding device 246 corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification (message “please remove the ball”) on the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult for the player to recognize.

  Note that the gap (hole) provided in the shielding device 246 of this example is surrounded by a member in the shape of a letter “B”. A notch-shaped gap surrounded by a letter may be provided.

  14D to 14F show examples of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the operation of the effect movable body. In the example shown in FIGS. 14D to 14F, effect movable bodies 800 and 804 are provided around the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The effect movable body 800 includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The effect movable body 800 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the screen. The effect movable body 800 can take at least a position that does not overlap the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a position that overlaps a part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, the effect movable body 800 may temporarily shield the fourth symbol display area 208e during the movement, but may not stop at the position where the fourth symbol display area 208e is shielded.

  The effect movable body 804 includes a sub display device using a liquid crystal display device or the like. The effect movable body 804 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the screen. In this example, the sub display device provided in the effect movable body 804 is provided with at least a special figure 1 hold icon display area 701 capable of displaying the same number of hold icons as the number of hold in FIG. Further, the sub display device can display a message for requesting a predetermined operation from the player.

  In the state shown in FIG. 14D, a small part of the lower end portion of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps the effect movable body 804, but all of the substantial display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible. It is. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the upper left of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A black circle is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e located in the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “3” is displayed in the special figure reservation number display area 208f. At the lower left of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed. This message is displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. On the other hand, in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 701 provided in the effect movable body 804, three hold icons are displayed. Although not shown, another effect movable body 800 is positioned above the upper end of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the state shown in FIG. 14 (e), the effect movable body 804 slightly moves upward, and a message “chance button pressed” is displayed on the sub display device of the moved effect movable body 804. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. Further, the message “please remove the ball” displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult to see due to the movement of the effect movable body 804. In other words, in this example, the effect movable body 804 that displays the operation request notification makes it difficult to visually recognize another operation request notification. Note that the same content may be displayed on the sub display device of the effect movable body 804 instead of making it difficult to visually recognize the message “please remove the ball” on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 14F shows a state after the chance button 136 is pressed. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed within the period in which the pressing of the chance button 136 is suggested by the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 or the like, and the predetermined effect lottery is won, the effect movable body 800 is displayed. Move down. It should be noted that the effect movable body 800 may always operate when the chance button 136 is pressed within a period in which pressing of the chance button 136 is suggested. In the state shown in FIG. 14F, the effect movable body 800 moves downward and overlaps the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the effect movable body 800 moved downward by pressing the chance button 136 shields a part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the symbol display areas 208a to 208c and the fourth symbol display in the screen. It stops so as not to overlap the area 208e, the special figure hold number display area 208f, and the operation request notification (message “please remove the ball”). The effect movable body 800 that has moved downward may shield the operation request notification of the decorative symbol display device 208 (a message “please remove the ball”) and make the operation request notification difficult to view. It should be noted that there is a display of “Press the chance button” on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. When the chance button is pressed, the effect movable body 804 moves, and the effect movable body 804 displays “Press the chance button”. May be difficult to view.

  Further, the effect movable body 800 moves to a position overlapping with the effect movable body 804 (sub display device), shields the operation request notification (message “chance button pressed”) of the sub display device, and notifies the operation request notification. It may be difficult to view. That is, at least a part of the operation request notification (for example, a message “chance button pressed”) is based on the fact that a predetermined condition including at least pressing of the chance button 136 (for example, pressing of the chance button 136) is established. It may be difficult to recognize by the movement operation of the effect movable body 800 executed in this manner.

  Movement of the effect movable bodies 800 and 804 to a position overlapping with the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 or movement of the effect movable body 800 to a position overlapping with the screen of the sub display device is performed by the decoration symbol display device 208 or the sub display device. In some cases, at least a part of the operation request notification corresponds to an operation that is difficult for the player to recognize.

  FIG. 15 shows an example of the configuration of the transparent plate member 118 provided on the front frame door 106. As shown in FIG. 15, a plurality of (for example, three) light sources 850 that allow light to enter the transparent plate member 118 are provided at one end portion (upper left end portion in this example) of the transparent plate member 118. . For example, an LED or the like is used as the light source 850. The plurality of light sources 850 are arranged at a predetermined arrangement interval that is relatively narrow in the in-plane direction of the transparent plate member 118. In addition, a plurality of light sources 852 (for example, the same number as the number of light sources 850) that allow light to enter the transparent plate member 118 are provided at another end portion of the transparent plate member 118 (lower right end portion in this example). It has been. For example, the same LED as the light source 850 is used as the light source 852. The plurality of light sources are arranged at an arrangement interval wider than the arrangement interval of the light sources 850 in the in-plane direction of the transparent plate member 118. For example, the light sources 850 and 852 are controlled to emit light by the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500, and emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

  On the front or back surface of the first region 118a of the transparent plate member 118, dot patterns (for example, a large number of concave portions, convex portions, concave and convex portions, etc.) that reflect or scatter light from the light source 850 are formed. Light from the light source 850 enters the transparent plate member 118 and guides the inside thereof, and is reflected or scattered by the first region 118a where the dot pattern is formed and extracted to the outside. Thus, when the light source 850 emits light, the player visually recognizes that the first region 118a of the transparent plate member 118 is emitting light. Since the arrangement interval of the light sources 850 is relatively narrow, it is possible to increase the proportion of light incident on the dot pattern of the first region 118a out of the light from the light source 850. For this reason, the emission intensity of the first region 118a is relatively high.

  On the front surface or the back surface of the second region 118b of the transparent plate member 118, a dot pattern (for example, a large number of concave portions, convex portions, concave and convex portions, etc.) that reflects or scatters light from the light source 852 is formed. Light from the light source 852 enters the transparent plate member 118 to guide the inside, and is reflected or scattered by the second region 118b where the dot pattern is formed and extracted to the outside. Accordingly, when the light source 852 emits light, the player visually recognizes that the second region 118b of the transparent plate member 118 is emitting light. Since the arrangement interval of the light sources 852 is wider than the arrangement interval of the light sources 850, the light from the light sources 852 is easily dispersed in the transparent plate member 118, and the light incident on the dot pattern of the second region 118b out of the light from the light sources 852. The ratio is likely to be low. For this reason, the emission intensity of the second region 118b may be lower than that of the first region 118a.

  When the first region 118a or the second region 118b of the transparent plate member 118 emits light, a display device such as a decorative symbol display device 208 arranged to overlap with the back side of the first region 118a or the second region 118b when viewed from the player Becomes difficult to see. For this reason, the light emission of the first region 118a and the second region 118b by the light emission of the light sources 850 and 852 is an operation that makes it difficult for the player to recognize at least part of the operation request notification on the display device such as the decorative symbol display device 208. May fall under.

  FIGS. 16A and 16B show another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 16 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed, together with a princess character line (part of the tutorial display) that “A reach is expected to develop”. Is displayed. This display suggests to the player that when the chance button 136 is pressed, the lines of other characters responding to the lines of the princess character (continuous tutorial display) are displayed. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, as shown in FIG. 16B, a line of a samurai character that “the chance is up by the appearance of a samurai” is displayed. Since the line of the samurai character overlaps with the line of the princess character and is displayed on the front layer, it is difficult to visually recognize the line of the princess character. The display of the princess character's dialogue and the mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed shown in FIG. 16A corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. The display of the samurai character dialogue shown in FIG. 16B corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification (princess character dialogue) is difficult for the player to recognize. In this example, at least a part of the operation request notification requesting pressing of the chance button 136 (the line of the princess character) is executed based on the operation related to the operation request notification (the chance button 136 is pressed). It is difficult for the player to recognize by the display of the character's dialogue.

  FIG. 16C shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 16C, a mark suggesting that the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This mark corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. Also, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed on the left side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. Below the message, a hero character image is displayed. An effect image representing the aura of the hero character is displayed behind the hero character image. This effect image is arranged behind the main character image and in a layer in front of the message “please remove the ball”. The effect image gradually increases as the player presses the chance button 136 for a long time.

  The effect image in the state shown in FIG. 16C overlaps with the message “please remove the sphere”, which makes the message difficult to see. The display of the effect image that is gradually increased corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification (message “please remove the ball”) is difficult for the player to recognize. In the state shown in FIG. 16C, the mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed is not difficult to visually recognize by the effect image, but may be difficult to visually recognize by the effect image. In this case, at least a part of the operation request notification requesting the pressing of the chance button 136 (a mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed) is an operation related to the operation request notification (the chance button 136 has been pressed for a long time). It becomes difficult for the player to recognize the effect image based on the enlarged display size of the effect image. In this example, there is a relation between the size of the effect image and the expectation level of the jackpot. For example, when the expectation level of the jackpot is high, the effect image tends to be large. Further, when the effect image is large, the degree of difficulty in visually confirming the operation request is likely to increase. As a result, when the degree of expectation for jackpot is high, the degree of difficulty in visually recognizing the operation request is likely to increase.

  FIG. 16D shows another example of display on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state shown in FIG. 16D, a mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed in front of the message “please remove the ball”, which makes the message difficult to see. In this example, the message “please remove the ball” and the mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed correspond to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. In addition, the display of a mark that suggests pressing of the chance button 136 corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification (a message “please remove the ball”) is difficult for the player to recognize.

  FIGS. 16E and 16F show examples of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 and audio output from the speaker 120. In the state shown in FIG. 16 (e), a mark indicating that the chance button 136 is pressed is displayed in the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 together with the message “PUSH !!!!”. These messages and marks correspond to an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136. Also, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed on the left side of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. Further, a voice message “please remove the sphere” is repeatedly output from the speaker 120 at a predetermined interval at a medium volume. The output of the voice message corresponds to an operation request notification for requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state and a predetermined effect lottery is won, the effect movable body 800 moves to a position overlapping the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. From the speaker 120, the sound effect “Jakeen” is output at a large volume. A voice message “please pull out the sphere” is repeatedly output from the speaker 120 at a medium volume, but this voice message is difficult to recognize because the sound effect is output at a high volume. That is, the output of the sound effect “Jakin” at a high volume corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification (output of a voice message “please remove the ball”) is difficult for the player to recognize.

  FIG. 17 shows that the first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front of the screen can be moved in the vertical direction and the first display and the second display can be blocked. The example of the relationship with a shielding means is shown. In FIG. 17 and FIGS. 18 to 20 described later, both the first display and the second display correspond to an operation request notification requesting a player for a predetermined operation. 17 to 19, the shielding means corresponds to an operation means capable of executing an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification is difficult for the player to visually recognize. The first display is located below the screen, and the second display is located above the first display. FIGS. 17A to 17H show in time series how the shielding means moves from below to above.

  In the state shown in FIG. 17A, the shielding means (not shown in FIG. 17A) is positioned below the lower end of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, the first display and the second display are visible.

  In the state shown in FIG. 17B, the upper end portion of the shielding means is positioned above the lower end of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but is positioned below the first display. In this state, the first display and the second display are visible.

  In the state shown in FIG. 17C, the shielding means overlaps the entire first display but does not overlap the second display. In this state, the first display is difficult to view (for example, the entire display is not visible), but the second display is visible.

  In the state shown in FIG. 17D, the shielding means overlaps the entire first display and also overlaps the lower part of the second display. In this state, the first display is difficult to visually recognize (for example, the whole cannot be visually recognized), and the second display is also difficult to visually recognize (for example, some cannot be visually recognized).

  In the state shown in FIG. 17 (e), the shielding means overlaps the upper part of the first display and also the entire second display. In this state, the first display is difficult to visually recognize (for example, a part cannot be visually recognized), and the second display is also difficult to visually recognize (for example, the whole cannot be visually recognized).

  In the state shown in FIG. 17F, the shielding means does not overlap the first display, but overlaps the entire second display. In this state, the first display can be visually recognized, but the second display is difficult to visually recognize (for example, the entire display cannot be visually recognized).

  In the state shown in FIG. 17G, the shielding means does not overlap the first display but overlaps the upper part of the second display. In this state, the first display is visually recognizable, but the second display is difficult to visually recognize (for example, some of the images cannot be visually recognized).

  In the state shown in FIG. 17H, the shielding means is located above the second display. In this state, the first display and the second display are visible.

  In the above description, there is an example in which there is one item to be hidden (shielding means) and two items to be hidden (first display and second display). However, there are two or more items to be hidden. One or three or more may be hidden.

  18 and 19 show examples of the relationship between the first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding means that can move in front of the screen in the vertical direction. . The width of the shielding means in the left-right direction is narrower than the width of the screen. In addition, the shielding means moves up and down in the vicinity of the center of the screen in the horizontal direction. The broken lines in the figure represent the movement trajectories of the left end and the right end of the shielding means.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18A, the first display and the second display are both horizontally long, and the width in the left-right direction is narrower than the width in the left-right direction of the shielding means. The left end of the first display is located on the right side of the movement locus of the left end of the shielding means, and the right end of the first display is located on the left side of the movement locus of the right end of the shielding means. The left end of the second display is located on the left side of the movement locus of the left end of the shielding means, and the right end of the second display is located on the left side of the movement locus of the right end of the shielding means. The vertical heights of the first display and the second display are both lower than the vertical height of the shielding means. In this case, depending on the position of the shielding means, the first display is a non-shielding state that does not overlap with the shielding means (visible state), a partially shielded state that partly overlaps the shielding means (partially difficult to see) ), And a total shielding state where the whole overlaps with the shielding means (a state where the whole is difficult to visually recognize). The second display can take two states, an unshielded state and a partially shielded state, depending on the position of the shielding means. The second display does not take full shielding. For example, when the shielding means moves from the lower movable end toward the upper movable end, the first display is in the order of non-shielding state → partial shielding state → full shielding state → partial shielding state → non-shielding state. The second display changes in the order of non-shielding state → partial shielding state → non-shielding state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18B, the first display is the same as that in FIG. 18A, but the second display is vertically long and is arranged at the right end of the screen. The second display is located on the right side of the movement locus at the right end of the shielding means. In this case, the first display can take the same three states as described above. The second display is in a non-shielding state regardless of the position of the shielding means.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18C, the first display is the same as in FIG. 18A, but the second display is arranged immediately above the first display. Both the first display and the second display are located between the left end movement locus and the right end movement locus of the shielding means. The distance from the upper end of the second display to the lower end of the first display is longer than the height in the vertical direction of the shielding means. In this case, each of the first display and the second display can take three states of a non-shielded state, a partially shielded state, and a fully shielded state depending on the position of the shielding means. However, both the first display and the second display do not take the full shielding state at the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 18D, the arrangement of the first display and the second display is switched as compared with the arrangement of FIG. In this case, each of the first display and the second display can take three states of a non-shielded state, a partially shielded state, and a fully shielded state depending on the position of the shielding means. However, both the first display and the second display do not take the full shielding state at the same time.

  In the example shown in FIG. 19A, the horizontal width of the second display is wider than the horizontal width of the shielding means as compared with the arrangement of FIG. The left end of the second display is located on the left side of the movement locus of the left end of the shielding means, and the right end of the second display is located on the right side of the movement locus of the right end of the shielding means. In this case, the first display can take three states, that is, a non-shielded state, a partially shielded state, and a fully shielded state, whereas the second display does not take a fully shielded state, and the non-shielded state, partly Two states of the shielding state can be taken.

  In the example shown in FIG. 19B, the first display is arranged on the left side of the screen, and the second display is arranged on the right side of the first display. The distance from the left end of the first display to the right end of the second display is wider than the horizontal width of the shielding means. The left end of the first display is located on the left side of the movement locus of the left end of the shielding means. The right end of the second display is located on the right side of the movement locus of the right end of the shielding means. In this case, the first display and the second display are not in a fully shielded state, and can take two states, a non-shielded state and a partially shielded state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 19 (c), the width of the shielding means is widened to the left as compared with the arrangement of FIG. 19 (b). The distance from the left edge of the first display to the right edge of the second display is wider than the horizontal width of the shielding means, but the left edge of the first display is located on the right side of the movement locus of the left edge of the shielding means. ing. In this case, the first display can take three states: a non-shielded state, a partially shielded state, and a fully shielded state. The second display does not take a fully shielded state, and can take two states, a non-shielded state and a partially shielded state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 19D, the first display is located at the upper left of the second display. The distance from the upper end of the first display to the lower end of the second display is longer than the vertical width of the shielding means. In this case, the first display can take three states: a non-shielded state, a partially shielded state, and a fully shielded state. The second display does not take a fully shielded state, and can take two states, a non-shielded state and a partially shielded state.

  Although FIGS. 17-19 demonstrated the example which a shielding means moves to an up-down direction, the example which a shielding means moves to another direction (for example, left-right direction) can be considered similarly.

  20A to 20D show examples of the first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in time series. Both the first display and the second display correspond to an operation request notification requesting a player for a predetermined operation. For example, the first display is arranged on the left side of the screen, and the second display is arranged near the center of the screen.

  FIG. 20A shows a state in which a certain special figure variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbols are changed and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a black circle indicating that the special symbols are changing is displayed. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “3” indicating that the special figure hold number is three is displayed. In this state, both the first display and the second display are displayed on the screen.

  FIG.20 (b) has shown the state which the special figure variable game was complete | finished. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a white circle indicating that the special symbol variation is stopped is displayed. In this state, both the first display and the second display are still displayed on the screen.

  FIG. 20C shows a state in which the next special figure variable game is started. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol change display is started, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a black circle indicating that the special symbol is changing is displayed. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “2” indicating that the special figure hold number has decreased from 3 to 2 is displayed. In this state, the first display continues to be displayed, but the second display is erased.

  FIG.20 (d) has shown the state which the special figure variable game was complete | finished. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a white circle indicating that the special symbol variation is stopped is displayed. In this state, the first display continues to be displayed.

  As described above, the display corresponding to the operation request notification includes a display that continues to be displayed over a plurality of change periods (first display in this example) and a display that is deleted when the next change starts (second display in this example). Display).

  20E to 20H show another example of the first display and the second display displayed on the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in time series.

  FIG. 20 (e) shows a state in which a certain special figure variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbols are changed and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a black circle indicating that the special symbols are changing is displayed. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “3” indicating that the special figure hold number is three is displayed. In this state, the first display is displayed on the screen.

  FIG. 20F shows a state in which the special figure variable game has been completed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a white circle indicating that the special symbol variation is stopped is displayed. In this state, a second display is newly displayed in addition to the first display.

  FIG. 20 (g) shows a state in which the next special figure variable game is started. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol change display is started, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a black circle indicating that the special symbol is changing is displayed. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “2” indicating that the special figure hold number has decreased from 3 to 2 is displayed. In this state, the first display continues to be displayed, but the second display is erased.

  FIG. 20 (h) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is finished. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination for notifying the deviation is stopped and displayed, and in the fourth symbol display area 208e, a white circle indicating that the special symbol variation is stopped is displayed. In this state, the second display is displayed again in addition to the first display.

  As described above, the display corresponding to the operation request notification is displayed over a plurality of variation periods, but is displayed only during the symbol stop display period and is erased during the symbol variation display period (in this example, There is a second display).

  FIG. 21 shows a specific example 1 of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in time series. In the example shown in FIGS. 21A to 21D, it is assumed that a confrontation effect in which a main character and an enemy character confront each other is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined effect start condition. When the confrontation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 21A, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy character. Further, as an operation request notification requesting the player to perform a long press operation of the chance button 136, a character message “Let's be upset by long press”, a button image representing the chance button 136, and a press operation of the chance button 136 are displayed. A downward arrow image to be displayed is displayed at the center of the screen. In the operation request notification of this example, the long press operation of the chance button 136 is requested, but it may be requested to press the chance button 136 one time or a plurality of times (short press is also possible). On the left side of the screen, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed as an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. In this example, the message “please remove the ball” overlaps with a part of the main character, but it does not need to overlap. In this example, the message “please remove the sphere” is displayed on the layer in front of the hero character image and the aura image described later, but is displayed on the layer behind the hero character image and the aura image. Alternatively, it may be displayed on a layer behind one of the main character image and the aura image and before the other.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 (for example, long press), in this example, as shown in FIG. 21B, the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 ends. Even after the chance button 136 is pressed, an operation request notification requesting a long press operation of the chance button 136 may continue to be displayed. Further, the moving image of the confrontation scene is continuously displayed, and when the long press operation of the chance button 136 is performed, the effect mode may change depending on the length of time of the long press operation. In this example, when the long press operation of the chance button 136 is performed for a predetermined time or longer, an aura image is displayed behind the main character. In the state shown in FIG. 21B, a relatively small aura image is displayed. The message “please remove the sphere” is difficult to see because the aura image is displayed. The display of the aura image corresponds to an operation in which at least part of the operation request notification on the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  The size of the displayed aura image may gradually increase as the time of the long press operation of the chance button 136 increases. For example, when the long press operation of the chance button 136 is further continued from the state shown in FIG. 21B, the display size of the aura image may be enlarged as shown in FIG. By increasing the display size of the aura image, the message “please remove the sphere” becomes more difficult to see. The enlargement of the display size of the aura image corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification on the decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  Further, when the long press operation of the chance button 136 is further continued from the state shown in FIG. 21C, the aura image may be further enlarged as shown in FIG. The larger the aura image, the higher the degree of difficulty in visually recognizing the message “please remove the ball”. In this example, the larger the aura image is, the higher the expectation is. The upper limit of the size of the aura image in the effect is determined in advance by random lottery at the start of the change. When the player stops the long press operation of the chance button 136, the size of the aura image may be maintained at the time when the long press operation is stopped, or the size of the aura image may be maintained. It may be gradually reduced.

  The size of the aura image at the end of the effect display in this example is determined by the predetermined upper limit of the size of the aura image and the long press operation time of the chance button 136. For example, the probability that the upper limit of the size of the aura image is set to the maximum value (for example, the size shown in FIG. 21D) is relatively high when the result of the determination of whether or not the change is a big hit, When the determination result is out of place, it is relatively low. In addition, the probability that the upper limit of the size of the aura image is set to the minimum value (for example, the size shown in FIG. 21B) is relatively low when the determination result of the variation is a big hit. When the determination result is out of place, it is relatively high.

  On the other hand, even if the predetermined upper limit of the size of the aura image is the maximum value, if the long press operation time of the chance button 136 is short, the effect display is ended while the size of the aura image remains small. There is a case. In this example, the upper limit of the long press operation time of the chance button 136 is the time from the start to the end of the effect (for example, the change period in the case of an effect executed over one change period or multiple changes). It is. Therefore, when the production period itself is short, the long press operation time tends to be short, and it may be difficult to execute the production with high expectation. On the other hand, when the production period is long, the long press operation time tends to be long, and thus a production with high expectation may be easily executed.

  In this example, the message “please remove the sphere” is displayed on the layer in front of the aura image, so it may not become invisible even if the degree of visual difficulty increases. You may make it invisible or you may make it the whole invisible.

  In this example, at least a part of the operation request notification (for example, a message “please remove the ball”) is sent to the player by a predetermined action (for example, display of the aura image, enlargement of the display size of the aura image). It becomes difficult to see. Here, in a state in which at least a part of the operation request notification is difficult to see, a part of the operation request notification is difficult to see, only a part of the operation request notification is difficult to see, and the whole operation request notification is difficult to see. , Part of the operation request notification is not visible, only part of the operation request notification is not visible, the whole operation request notification is not visible, part of the operation request notification is difficult to see and the other part is visible (viewing Easy), part of the operation request notification is not visible and the other part is visible (easy to see), part of the operation request notification is difficult to see and the other part is not visible, part of the operation request notification is It is difficult to view, and some of the other parts are not visible, and another part is visible (easy to see).

  FIG. 22 shows a specific example 2 of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in time series. In the example shown in FIGS. 22A to 22D, it is assumed that a confrontation effect in which a main character and an enemy character confront each other is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined effect start condition. When the confrontation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 22A, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a moving image of the confrontation scene between the main character and the enemy character. Further, as an operation request notification requesting the player to perform a long press operation of the chance button 136, a character message “Let's be upset by long press”, a button image representing the chance button 136, and a press operation of the chance button 136 are displayed. A downward arrow image to be displayed is displayed at the center of the screen. In this example, unlike FIG. 21A, the message “please remove the ball” is not displayed.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 (for example, long press), in this example, as shown in FIG. 22B, the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 continues to be displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 22B, a relatively small aura image is displayed behind the main character image. The aura image of this example is displayed in a layer in front of the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 behind the hero character image. In the state shown in FIG. 22B, since the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 and the aura image do not overlap, the operation request notification is not difficult to visually recognize.

  In the state shown in FIG. 22C, the display size of the aura image is enlarged by the long press operation of the chance button 136. The enlarged aura image overlaps with a part of the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136. Thereby, a part of the operation request notification is not visible.

  In the state shown in FIG. 22D, the display size of the aura image is further enlarged by the long press operation of the chance button 136. Compared to FIG. 22C, the enlarged portion of the aura image increases an overlapping portion (for example, an overlapping area) with an operation request notification requesting a long press operation of the chance button 136, and the operation request notification is visually recognized. The impossible part is increasing.

  In this example, at least a part of the operation request notification (for example, a display requesting a long press operation of the chance button 136) is performed by an operation requested by the operation request notification (for example, a long press operation of the chance button 136). An operation (for example, displaying an aura image, enlarging the display size of the aura image) executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition including at least a failure makes it difficult for the player to recognize.

  The layer on which the operation request notification is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 is relatively far behind (for example, aura, for example) as shown in FIG. The system side (for example, a request for removing a ball or a request such as “Please call a store clerk”) may be relatively in front as shown in the example of FIG. In some cases, it may be on the side (for example, nearer than the aura image).

  FIG. 23 shows a specific example 3 of the effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in time series. In the example shown in FIGS. 23A to 23D, as in FIG. 21, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed as an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. Yes. Similarly to FIG. 22, as an operation request notification requesting the player to perform a long press operation of the chance button 136, a character message “Let's be upset by long press”, a button image representing the chance button 136, and a chance A downward arrow image representing the pressing operation of the button 136 is displayed.

  When the player presses the chance button 136 (for example, long press), in this example, as shown in FIG. 23B, the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 continues to be displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 23B, a relatively small aura image is displayed behind the main character image. The aura image in this example is displayed in a layer in front of the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 and the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 behind the hero character image. Yes. In the state shown in FIG. 23B, the aura image overlaps with a part of the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132, but what is the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136? There is no overlap. Therefore, although the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 is difficult to visually recognize, the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 is not difficult to visually check.

  In the state shown in FIG. 23C, the display size of the aura image is enlarged. Thereby, the overlapping part of the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 and the aura image increases. Therefore, the degree of difficulty in visually recognizing the operation request notification is increasing. The aura image also overlaps with an operation request notification requesting a long press operation of the chance button 136. Thereby, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the operation request notification.

  In the state shown in FIG. 23D, the display size of the aura image is further enlarged. Thereby, since the overlapping part of the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 and the aura image is further increased, the degree of difficulty in visual recognition of the operation request notification is increased. Further, since the overlapping portion between the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 and the aura image is further increased, the degree of difficulty in visual recognition of the operation request notification is increased.

  Here, for example, in the change from FIG. 23C to FIG. 23D, regarding the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 and the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136, In both cases, the overlap with the aura image is increasing. However, since the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 is displayed on the layer in front of the aura image, the degree of difficulty in visual recognition may not increase so much even if the overlapping portion increases (difficulty in visual recognition). May not change at all, or the degree of difficulty in visual recognition may decrease). On the other hand, since the operation request notification requesting the long press operation of the chance button 136 is displayed in a layer behind the aura image, an increase in the overlapping portion may directly lead to an increase in the degree of difficulty in visual recognition.

  FIG. 24 shows a specific example 4 of effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. In the state shown in FIG. 24A, a confrontation effect in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other is started. In addition, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed as an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. Further, as an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136, a text message “PUSH !!!!”, a button image indicating the chance button 136, and a downward arrow image indicating the pressing operation of the chance button 136 are displayed. It is displayed.

  When the player presses the chance button 136, in this example, a moving image in which the facial expression of the main character is enlarged is displayed on the moving image of the confrontation effect and the small screen arranged in the layer in front of various operation request notifications. A cut-in production will be performed. In this example, a plurality of cut-in effects having different degrees of reliability (expectations) are prepared. The reliability of the cut-in effect depends on the facial expression of the main character displayed on the small screen (for example, the higher the reliability is for a facial expression with a spirit), or the vertical height of the small screen (for example, the higher the height is (Or the thicker the upper and lower frames), the higher the reliability).

  FIG. 24B shows an example of a cut-in effect with high reliability. In this example, since the height of the small screen is high, both the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 and the operation request notification requesting the pressing of the chance button 136 are both the small display displayed on the previous layer. The screen is invisible.

  FIG. 24C shows an example of a cut-in effect with low reliability. In this example, since the height of the small screen is low, the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 does not overlap the small screen at all. Therefore, the entire operation request notification is visible. Further, only part of the operation request notification requesting the pressing of the chance button 136 overlaps the small screen. Therefore, only a part of the operation request notification is not visible.

  As shown in FIGS. 24B and 24C, in this example, the degree of difficulty in visually recognizing various operation request notifications varies depending on the type of cut-in effect. The higher the reliability of the cut-in effect, the higher the degree of difficulty in viewing various operation request notifications.

  The operation request notification requesting the pressing of the chance button 136 may be deleted after the cut-in effect small screen is displayed (see FIG. 24C), or the cut-in effect small screen is displayed. And may be erased (see FIG. 24D).

  FIG. 25 shows a specific example 5 of effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. In the state shown in FIG. 25A, a confrontation effect in which the main character and the enemy character confront each other is started. In addition, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed as an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. Further, as an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136, a text message “PUSH !!!!”, a button image indicating the chance button 136, and a downward arrow image indicating the pressing operation of the chance button 136 are displayed. It is displayed. The button image of this example is displayed with a larger display size as the reliability of the variation is higher. The button image shown in FIG. 25A is a standard size. The button image is displayed on the layer before the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132.

  FIG. 25B shows a state in which an enlarged button image is displayed. The enlarged button image overlaps a part of the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132. Thereby, a part of the operation request notification is not visible. The degree of difficulty in visually recognizing the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 increases as the display size of the button image increases. In this example, the operation request notification is not difficult to view when a standard-size button image is displayed, but is difficult to view only when an enlarged-size button image is displayed.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 25A (button image is a standard size), and when the chance button 136 is pressed in the state shown in FIG. 25B (button image is an enlarged size) Then, the performance performed thereafter may or may not be the same. For example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, a predetermined effect movable body operates. The operation request notification may be difficult to visually recognize due to the operation of the effect movable body. Different production movable bodies may be operated depending on the size of the displayed button image, and the operation pattern (eg, movable range) of the production movable body may be different depending on the size of the displayed button image. May be.

In the state shown in FIG. 25A, the entire standard-size button image is in an opaque state (transmittance 0%). For this reason, the background image of the portion overlapping the button image cannot be visually recognized. On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 25B, a part (side surface part) of the enlarged button image is in the transmissive state (transmittance 100%). For this reason, a part of the hero character, a part of the enemy character, and a part of the background image, which overlap with the side part of the button image, are visible. As described above, the entire operation request notification (button image) displayed in the standard size is in an opaque state, and a part of the operation request notification image (button image) displayed in the enlarged size is in a transparent state. It may be.
A part of the standard size button image may be in a transparent state. The operation request notification image (button image) displayed in the enlarged size may be entirely opaque. Further, the transmittance of at least a part of the operation request notification image (button image) displayed in the enlarged size may be 0% to 100%. Further, the transmittance of at least a part of the operation request notification image (button image) may be gradually increased as time passes. Note that only the side surface of the button image may be transparent, and the upper surface of the button image (the portion representing the upper surface (pressed surface) of the chance button 136) may be opaque. Further, only the upper surface of the button image may be transparent, and the side surface of the button image may be opaque.

  In the example shown in FIG. 25C, a message “Mode change with left / right key” is displayed on the layer before the enlarged button image, overlapping the button image. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the selection buttons 136b and 136c (see FIG. 12A). As described above, the operation request notification may be displayed on a layer in front of the button image.

  FIG. 26 shows a specific example 6 of effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26A shows a state in which the big hit effect is started. On the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a message “Big hit!” Is displayed. In this example, the jackpot round number is 16R, but it is assumed that the player has not been notified of the jackpot round number at this time.

  In the state shown in FIG. 26 (b) thereafter, the message “big hit !!” is deleted, and the symbol combination selected is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 26C, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed. This message is displayed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. This message corresponds to an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132.

  In the state shown in FIG. 26D after that, a message “16R big hit confirmed by crest falling !!” is displayed.

  In the subsequent state shown in FIG. 26 (e), as an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136, a message “Press!”, A button image representing the chance button 136, and the chance button 136 are displayed. A downward arrow image indicating the pressing operation is displayed.

  In this example, since the number of rounds of big hit is 16R, when the chance button 136 is pressed, an animation in which the family crest image moves (falls) from above is displayed as shown in FIG. Thus, the player is notified that the number of rounds per jackpot is 16R. Further, since the family crest image is displayed in front of the operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 (message “please remove the ball”), a part of the operation request notification is a family crest image. It becomes difficult to see. That is, the display of the animation in which the family crest image moves from above corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  In the state shown in FIG. 26G thereafter, the family crest image is deleted, and the entire operation request notification requesting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132 becomes visible.

  FIG. 27 shows a specific example 7 of effects executed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27A shows a state in which the effect of selecting the SP reach after the reach development is started. In this state, the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is horizontally divided into three. The left split area represents A reach with medium expectation (two stars), the middle split area represents B reach with high expectation (three stars), and the right split area represents the highest expectation (five stars) ) X reach. In the center of the screen, as an operation request notification requesting the player to press the chance button 136, a message “Determine destination with buttons”, a button image representing the chance button 136, and an operation for pressing the chance button 136 are displayed. And a downward arrow image indicating that is displayed. Further, on the left side of the screen, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed as an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the thick frame cursor surrounding any one of the three divided areas starts to move between the three divided areas at high speed. The thick frame cursor stops when the chance button 136 is pressed. Then, the reach effect corresponding to the divided area surrounded by the stopped thick frame cursor is selected. Note that which reach effect is selected, that is, in which divided area the thick frame cursor surrounds may be determined in advance.

  For example, when the B cursor is selected in a state where the thick frame cursor surrounds the central divided region and B reach is selected, the central divided region and the thick frame surrounding it are displayed as shown in FIGS. An animation is displayed that expands the cursor to the entire screen. Thereby, the player is notified that the B reach has been selected. At this time, since the thick frame cursor crosses the operation request notification (message “please remove the ball”) displayed on the left side of the screen, the operation request notification becomes difficult to visually recognize. Accordingly, the display of the animation in which the central divided region and the thick frame cursor surrounding it are enlarged over the entire screen corresponds to an operation in which at least a part of the operation request notification is difficult for the player to see.

  As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment has the notification control means (for example, the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit) that can execute at least the first and second controls. 500), a plurality of operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, a chance button 136, a ball discharge lever 132, etc.), and a notification means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, an effect movable body) that can at least notify information. 804, a sub-display device, a speaker 120, etc.), wherein the notification control means can execute at least the first control when the first control condition is satisfied. The notification control means is capable of executing at least the second control when the second control condition is satisfied, and the first control is provided to the notification means. The operation information includes at least control for performing notification, and the operation information includes at least information for prompting operation of one of the plurality of operation units, and the operation information notification , Second control (for example, control for operating the effect movable body, control for moving the shielding means, control for displaying the effect image on the layer in front of the operation information in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the light sources 850 and 852. And the second control condition is a state in which the second control condition is one of the plurality of operation means. It is characterized in that at least one of the operating means is operated.

  According to this configuration, the operation information that prompts the operation of the operation means can be made difficult to recognize, and thus the player's attention may be attracted to the operation information. In addition, since the effects can be diversified, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, when a determination result is established, whether or not the determination is possible can be performed at least by a determination unit (for example, special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231), special figure 2 related. And a lottery process (step S229). In addition, in the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, when a symbol variation condition is established, at least a symbol variation stop display is executed to stop and display a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the success / failure determination after performing symbol variation. It further has possible symbol display means (for example, special symbol display device 212, special symbol 2 display device 214, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.). In addition, in the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, when the control state transition condition is satisfied, the first control state and the second control state (for example, the control state having higher advantage than the first control state) Control state transition means (for example, special figure 1 state update process (step S227), special figure 2 state update process (step S225), etc.) It further has these.

  In the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, game control including at least main control means (for example, the main control unit 300) and sub control means (for example, the first sub control unit 400, the second sub control unit 500, etc.). And the main control means is capable of executing at least control relating to the progress of the game, and the sub control means is capable of executing at least control relating to presentation based on a control command transmitted from the main control means. It is a characteristic.

  In the gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment, the operation information (for example, information for prompting the operation of the ball discharge lever 132) is information acquired by the main control means (for example, lower plate full tank error information, main control unit). Based on information included in a command transmitted from 300 to the first sub-control unit 400). The notification control means may include the main control means and the sub control means.

  In the above embodiment, the notification that suggests the operation of the operating means (for example, the chance button 136) to the player includes an effect of the operating means itself (for example, lighting, blinking, vibration, etc. of the chance button 136). Also good.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 27 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
A plurality of operation means (for example, a chance button 136, a ball discharge lever 132, a selection button 136b, 136c);
Display means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
Display control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least the first control;
A determination unit (e.g., main control unit 300, special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231)) capable of performing at least a determination on the validity;
A symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing at least a symbol variation display;
Control state transition means (for example, main control unit 300, special figure 2 state update process (step S225), special figure 1 state update process (step S227)) capable of executing at least a plurality of control state transition controls;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (for example, a chance button 136),
At least one of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means (for example, a ball discharge lever 132),
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display (for example, a button image representing the chance button 136),
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132 (“please remove the ball”)),
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display (for example, an aura image, a family crest image),
The display control means can execute at least the first control when the first condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the first operation means is operated during execution of the first display,
The first control includes at least control for displaying the third display on the display means;
The third display is at least displayable in the first period,
When the first control is executed, the third display is displayed in front of the second display, so that at least a part of the second display (hereinafter referred to as “first region”). Is less visible after execution than before execution of the first control,
At least a part of the third display (hereinafter referred to as “second region”) is displayed at a position overlapping the first region,
First control means (for example, main control unit 300);
Second control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least executing control according to a command from the first control means;
With
The second control means is capable of at least controlling the display means according to the command,
The second operation means is configured such that, when operated, the game ball is discharged from a storage tray (for example, the lower plate 128) capable of storing the game ball.
The first display includes at least an image showing an appearance of the first operation means,
The second display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray,
The third display is an effect display that produces a game.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, by reducing the visibility of at least a part of the notification prompting the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray by the effect display, the player may be able to concentrate and enjoy the effect display. is there.

(2) The pachinko machine 100,
Even if the third display is erased when the first period has elapsed in the state where the second display is being performed during the execution of the third display, the second display Can be displayed continuously,
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the second display may be continuously displayed after the third display is erased so that the player can not forget the operation of the second operation means. is there.

(3) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display can be displayed even during execution of the second display,
The second display can be displayed even during execution of the first display.
It is characterized by that.

(4) The pachinko machine 100,
The first control can be executed even during execution of the second display.
The first control can be executed even when the second display is not being executed.
It is characterized by that.

(5) The pachinko machine 100,
The display control means is capable of executing at least the second control when the second condition is satisfied,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the second operation means is operated during execution of the second display,
The second control includes at least control for erasing the second display displayed on the display means.
It is characterized by that.

(6) The pachinko machine 100,
The display control means can execute at least the third control when the third condition is satisfied,
The display control means can execute at least the fourth control when the fourth condition is satisfied,
The third control includes at least control for displaying the first display on the display means,
The fourth control includes at least a control for displaying the second display on the display means,
The first display can be displayed at least in a second period (for example, an operation reception period of the chance button 136).
It is characterized by that.

(7) The pachinko machine 100,
The second period is a period started before the start of the first period.
It is characterized by that.

(8) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display includes at least a display for prompting an operation of the first operation means,
The second display includes at least a display prompting the operation of the second operation means.
It is characterized by that.

(9) The pachinko machine 100,
The transmittance of the second region is not 100%,
It is characterized by that.

(10) The pachinko machine 100,
When the first control is executed, the third display is displayed on the front surface of the second display, so that the first area after the execution of the first control is not visible. Which is
It is characterized by that.

(11) The pachinko machine 100,
The second control means includes at least the display control means.

(12) The pachinko machine 100,
With multiple control boards,
At least one of the plurality of control boards is a first control board (for example, the main board 156),
At least one of the plurality of control boards is a second control board (for example, the first sub board 160),
The first control means includes at least the first control board,
The second control means includes at least the second control board.
It is characterized by that.

(13) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
A plurality of operation means (for example, a chance button 136, a ball discharge lever 132, a selection button 136b, 136c);
Display means capable of executing at least a plurality of types of display (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
Display control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of executing at least the first control;
A determination unit (e.g., main control unit 300, special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231)) capable of performing at least a determination on the validity;
A symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing at least a symbol variation display;
Control state transition means (for example, main control unit 300, special figure 2 state update process (step S225), special figure 1 state update process (step S227)) capable of executing at least a plurality of control state transition controls;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means (for example, a chance button 136),
At least one of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means (for example, a ball discharge lever 132),
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a first display (for example, a button image representing the chance button 136),
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a second display (for example, an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132 (“please remove the ball”)),
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a third display (for example, an aura image, a family crest image),
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display (for example, an image of a hero character, an image of an enemy character),
The display control means can execute at least the first control when the first condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the first operation means is operated during execution of the first display,
The first control includes at least control for displaying the third display on the display means;
The third display is at least displayable in the first period,
Before the first control is executed, the fourth display is displayed on the back of the second display,
When the first control is executed, the third display is displayed in front of the second display, so that at least a part of the second display (hereinafter referred to as “first region”). Is less visible after execution than before execution of the first control,
At least a part of the third display (hereinafter referred to as “second region”) is displayed at a position overlapping the first region,
First control means (for example, main control unit 300);
Second control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least executing control according to a command from the first control means;
With
The second control means is capable of at least controlling the display means according to the command,
The second operation means is configured such that, when operated, the game ball is discharged from a storage tray (for example, the lower plate 128) capable of storing the game ball.
The first display includes at least an image showing an appearance of the first operation means,
The second display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray,
The third display is an effect display that produces a game.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, by reducing the visibility of at least a part of the notification prompting the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray by the effect display, the player may be able to concentrate and enjoy the effect display. is there.

(14) The pachinko machine 100,
Even if the third display is erased when the first period has elapsed in the state where the second display is being performed during the execution of the third display, the second display Can be displayed continuously,
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the second display may be continuously displayed after the third display is erased so that the player can not forget the operation of the second operation means. is there.

(15) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display can be displayed even during execution of the second display,
The second display can be displayed even during execution of the first display.
It is characterized by that.

(16) The pachinko machine 100,
The first control can be executed even during execution of the second display.
The first control can be executed even when the second display is not being executed.
It is characterized by that.

(17) The pachinko machine 100,
The display control means is capable of executing at least the second control when the second condition is satisfied,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the second operation means is operated during execution of the second display,
The second control includes at least control for erasing the second display displayed on the display means.
It is characterized by that.

(18) The pachinko machine 100,
The display control means can execute at least the third control when the third condition is satisfied,
The display control means can execute at least the fourth control when the fourth condition is satisfied,
The third control includes at least control for displaying the first display on the display means,
The fourth control includes at least a control for displaying the second display on the display means,
The first display can be displayed at least in a second period (for example, an operation reception period of the chance button 136).
It is characterized by that.

(19) The pachinko machine 100,
The second period is a period started before the start of the first period.
It is characterized by that.

(20) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display includes at least a display for prompting an operation of the first operation means,
The second display includes at least a display prompting the operation of the second operation means.
It is characterized by that.

(21) The pachinko machine 100,
The transmittance of the second region is not 100%,
It is characterized by that.

(22) The pachinko machine 100,
The second control means includes at least the display control means.

(23) The pachinko machine 100,
With multiple control boards,
At least one of the plurality of control boards is a first control board (for example, the main board 156),
At least one of the plurality of control boards is a second control board (for example, the first sub board 160),
The first control means includes at least the first control board,
The second control means includes at least the second control board.
It is characterized by that.

(24) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
A game machine including display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of displays,
At least one of the plurality of types of display is a first display (for example, an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132 (“please remove the ball”)),
At least one of the plurality of types of displays is a second display (for example, an aura image, a family crest image),
The display means is capable of displaying at least the first display in a first display area,
The display means is capable of displaying at least the second display in a second display area,
The first display includes at least a notification prompting to discharge the game ball,
The second display is at least different from the first display;
At least a part of the second display area overlaps at least a part of the first display area.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the production can be diversified, so that the player can be prevented from getting bored and the interest of the game can be improved.

(25) The pachinko machine 100,
The display means is capable of starting display of at least the second display during display of the first display.
It is characterized by that.

(26) The pachinko machine 100,
The display means is capable of starting display of at least the second display during non-display of the first display.
It is characterized by that.

(27) The pachinko machine 100,
The display means can display at least the first display during the display of the second display.
It is characterized by that.

(28) The pachinko machine 100,
The display means can start displaying at least the first display during non-display of the second display.
It is characterized by that.

(29) The pachinko machine 100,
At least a part of the first display can be displayed at least in a part of the second display area.
It is characterized by that.

(30) The pachinko machine 100,
At least a part of the second display can be displayed at least in at least a part of the first display area.
It is characterized by that.

(31) The pachinko machine 100,
At least a part of the second display can be displayed at least so as to overlap at least a part of the first display.
It is characterized by that.

(32) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display includes at least a plurality of characters (for example, a message “please remove the ball”),
It is characterized by that.

(33) The pachinko machine 100,
At least some of the plurality of characters can be displayed at least so as to overlap at least part of the second display.
It is characterized by that.

(34) The pachinko machine 100,
At least a part of the second display can be displayed at least so as to overlap at least a part of the plurality of characters.
It is characterized by that.

(35) The pachinko machine 100,
At least some of the plurality of characters have at least different visibility before starting the display of the second display and after starting the display of the second display.
It is characterized by that.

(36) The pachinko machine 100,
A storage tray (for example, a lower tray 128) that can store game balls is provided,
The first display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray.
It is characterized by that.

(37) The pachinko machine 100,
The second display is an effect display that produces a game.
It is characterized by that.

(38) The pachinko machine 100,
Provided with operation means (for example, ball discharge lever 132, chance button 136) that can be operated at least by the player,
It is characterized by that.

(39) The pachinko machine 100,
Movable means (for example, production movable body 224, production movable body 800, production movable body 802, production movable body 804),
The movable means is at least movable to a first position;
The movable means is at least movable to a second position;
It is characterized by that.

(40) The pachinko machine 100,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
It is characterized by that.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a game table according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described. About the structure of the pachinko machine 100 by this Embodiment, since it is the same as that of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted. Hereinafter, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 28 shows a specific performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2-1 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 28A to 28F show, in this order, specific effects on the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in time series.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has an effect movable body 806. The effect movable body 806 is installed below the effect device 206. The effect movable body 806 is driven by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display means) can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the screen. . The effect movable body 806 has a horizontally long rectangular shape. The effect movable body 806 includes a sub display device 808 (second display means) using a liquid crystal display device or the like. The sub display device 808 is fixed to the effect movable body 806 so that the display area is positioned within the horizontally long rectangular frame 806a of the effect movable body 806. For this reason, the sub display device 808 can move integrally with the effect movable body 806. A frame portion 807 outside the frame 806 a is a frame area of the sub display device 808. The frame portion 807 may be decorated with a resin member, an LED lamp, or the like.

  Here, the positional relationship between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 808 (effect movable body 806) will be described. Thereafter, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on, for example, an island facility, a position relatively close to the player facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as “front”, and a position farther from the player than the “front” is indicated. Indicated as “after”. Therefore, for example, the one closer to the player is expressed as “front”, and the one farther from the player than “front” is expressed as “rear”. Further, the side closer to the player is referred to as “front side”, and the side farther from the player than the “front side” is referred to as “rear side”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 808 (effect movable body 806) are installed in the effect device 206. From the rear side to the front side of the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 808 (effect movable body 806) are installed in this order. In other words, the sub display device 808 is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 808 in the effect device 206, in order from the rear side, a decoration part (for example, a decoration part 810 described later), an effect movable body 224, and a transparent plate (for example, described later). A light guide plate 812) is provided. In addition, the arrangement | sequence order of a decoration part, the production | presentation movable body 224, and a transparent board can be changed arbitrarily. Further, the transparent plate may not be provided.

  In addition, on the front side of the sub display device (production movable body 806) in the production device 206, a decoration part (for example, a decoration part 814 described later), a transparent plate, and a front stage 244 are installed in this order from the rear side. The transparent plate is provided to prevent the game ball from entering the rear side of the front stage. Therefore, the transparent plate only needs to prevent the ingress of game balls from the front stage 244, and may be installed only below the rendering device 206 (near the front stage 244). It may be installed so as to cover the entire surface of 206. Further, the arrangement order of the decorative portion and the transparent plate may be the order of the transparent plate and the decorative plate from the rear side to the front side. Note that the transparent plate may be omitted.

  28 to 30, the decorative symbol display device 208 (first display means), the effect movable body 806, the sub display device 808 (second display means), the special figure 1 display device 212, and the special figure. 1 hold lamp 218, special figure 2 display device 214, and special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are shown. For ease of explanation, each component is shown differently from the arrangement shown in FIG. In addition, the extinguishing portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lighting portions are shown in black.

  A hold icon display area 710 is provided in the vicinity of the left side slightly from the center of the lower long side (horizontal side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the hold icon display area 710, one or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed. In the hold icon display area 710, it is possible to notify the number of hold of the special figure variable game according to the number of hold icons, and the special figure variable game related to each hold with a predetermined reliability according to the display mode of each hold icon. It is possible to make a prefetch notice of the determination result. The hold icon display area 710 of this example can display a maximum of four hold icons, and is roughly divided into four areas, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. ing. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively. That is, a hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most recently stored) hold 1 can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, the 2nd to 4th hold 2 in the second to fourth areas. The hold icons corresponding to -4 can be displayed. Further, in the hold icon display area 710 of this example, only the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed, but the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed together.

  Two fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 each having two small square display areas are provided below the right short side (vertical side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. . The upper square display area is the special figure 1 fourth symbol display area b1 for the special figure 1, and the lower square display area is the special figure 2 fourth symbol display area b2 for the special figure 2. In the fourth symbol, the square display area repeatedly blinks in a predetermined color, for example, during the special symbol variation game, and is in a state of being painted in the predetermined color, for example, during the symbol stop display. In this example and the following examples, the square display area of the fourth symbol in the special figure variable game is outlined, and only the outline of the square display area is shown. In this example, the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are always displayed at fixed positions during the execution of the special figure variable game regardless of the game state and the type of effect.

  Also, rectangular reserved number display areas 712a and 712b are provided near the center of the right short side (longitudinal side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The number-of-holds display area 712a displays the number of holds shown in FIG. 1, and the number-of-holds display area 712b displays the number of holds shown in FIG.

  FIG. 28A shows a decorative pattern of “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c at the center of the rectangular display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 after the special figure 1 variable game is finished. Is displayed in a stopped state, and it is informed that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is out of date. In the special figure 1 display device 212, a special figure I (first off symbol) indicating that the special figure 1 variable game is out of play is stopped and displayed. In the special figure 2 display device 214, a special figure I indicating that the determination result of the previous special figure 2 variable game is wrong is stopped and displayed. In addition, the 1st to 4th LEDs from the left of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 are respectively lit, and it is displayed that the number of the operation holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is four. All the LEDs of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are turned off, and it is displayed that the number of the operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is zero.

  Since the special figure variation games of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are not executed, both of the two fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are filled with a predetermined color. Further, a hold icon a1 is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 710, a hold icon a2 is displayed in the second area, a hold icon a3 is displayed in the third area, and a hold icon a4 is displayed in the fourth area. The display mode of the hold icons a1 to a4 is a white circle. Further, since the number of holds in the special figure 1 at the present time is four, “4” is displayed in the hold number display area 712a, and since the number of hold in the special figure 2 is zero, the number in the hold number display area 712b. Is displayed as “0”.

  In addition, the effect movable body 806 is stopped at the initial position (first position). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the initial position of the effect movable body 806 is below the decorative symbol display device 208. When the effect movable body 806 is located at the initial position, the effect movable body 806 and the decorative symbol display device 208 do not overlap each other when viewed from the player. When the effect movable body 806 is waiting at the initial position, the sub display device 808 displays the model name of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, “CR Yoshimune”).

  FIG. 28 (b) continuing from FIG. 28 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is started. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the variable display of the special figure 1 is executed, and in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 (may be referred to as left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c), the decorative symbols are displayed. The fluctuation display is executed. In the present embodiment, during execution of the special figure 1 variable game, one segment (for example, the central segment) of the seven segments of the special figure 1 display device 212 is repeatedly turned on and off. Further, during execution of the special figure 2 variable game, one segment (for example, the central segment) of the seven segments of the special figure 2 display device 214 is repeatedly turned on and off. Thereby, the player can confirm that each special figure is variably displayed.

  In addition, since one special figure 1 hold has been consumed and the number of special figure 1 holds has become three, the first to third LEDs from the left of the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 are respectively lit, and the hold icon In the display area 710, the hold icon a1 is displayed in the first area, the hold icon a2 is displayed in the second area, the hold icon a3 is displayed in the third area, and “3” is displayed in the hold number display area 712a. ”Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of suspension in FIG. 1 is three.

  FIG. 28 (c) continuing from FIG. 28 (b) shows a state in which the notice effect (reach effect) of the special figure 1 variable game being executed is started. In this example, a character string “Let's support Yoshimune with repeated button strokes!” And a villager c5 who supports Yoshimune are displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, on the sub display device 808, an image imitating the chance button 136 and Tonosama (Yoshimune) c1 are displayed. In addition, the sub display device 808 displays a character string “good” above the image imitating the chance button 136 to notify that the operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 is started. In addition, the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c, which are located at substantially the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, are reduced and moved to the upper right of the display area, and the decorative symbol variation display is executed. .

  FIG. 28 (d) continuing from FIG. 28 (c) shows a state in which the operation acceptance period of the chance button 136 has started. When the operation reception period is started, a character string “continuous hit!” Is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sub display device 808 is white indicating an image imitating the chance button 136. A pull-out arrow is displayed, and an effect that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the chance button 136 is executed. The sub display device 808 displays a horizontally long bar-shaped meter image below the image imitating the chance button 136. The meter image includes a rectangular frame image, and indicates the operation reception period of the chance button 136 by the length of the colored portion in the frame image. In addition, the sub-display device 808 displays a character string “support”, and an effect of supporting the grandfather c1 is executed.

  FIG. 28 (e) continuing from FIG. 28 (d) shows a state in which the player has hit the chance button 136 a plurality of times. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of character strings “do your best!” Corresponding to the number of times the chance button 136 has been pressed (the number of times the chance button sensor 426 has detected the chance button 136 has been detected) is displayed.

  In addition, after the operation reception period starts, the effect movable body 806 starts moving upward in the plane in front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The pachinko machine 100 may start moving the effect movable body 224 according to the number of consecutive hits of the chance button 136, or start moving when other conditions are satisfied (for example, the start of the operation reception period, the elapse of a predetermined time). May be. While the effect movable body 806 is moving in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, all or part of the images and symbols displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 overlapping the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808. Becomes invisible. In the state shown in FIG. 28 (e), the entire hold icon a3 is invisible.

  Further, at the time shown in FIG. 28 (e), the lower plate full tank error is detected based on the fact that the lower plate full sensor detects that the game balls (prize balls) stored in the lower plate 128 are full. Occurs. For example, a prize ball that has not been paid out for any reason during the previous jackpot game is paid out at this time, or a prize ball is paid out based on the winning of a game ball to the general winning slot 226, and is not in a jackpot game. May also cause a bottom full tank error. When a lower pan full tank error occurs, a lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 703 (first display) is displayed at substantially the center of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower pan full tank error display 703 is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information on the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. The lower plate full tank error display 703 corresponds to an operation request notification for requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 28 (e), the lower plate full tank error display 703 has a band-shaped band image and a character string “please remove the sphere” displayed at the approximate center of the band image. At the start of displaying the lower pan full tank error display, the belt-like image is displayed in black and opaque. The character string “please remove the sphere” is displayed in white letters. In addition, the lower plate full tank error display 703 is displayed in a layer before the villager c5 and the character string “do your best!” Displayed in the effect display area 208d. For this reason, a part of the character string of villager c5 and “Do your best!” Is invisible. Further, the display of “0” in the number-of-holds display area 712 b indicating the number of holds in FIG. 2 is displayed in front of the lower pan full tank error display 703. Thereby, even when the lower plate full tank error occurs, the player may be able to accurately recognize the number of reserved special figures. Further, the lower plate full tank error display 703 is displayed without overlapping the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2. For this reason, the visibility of the fourth symbol does not deteriorate even when the lower pan full tank error occurs.

  FIG. 28 (f) continuing from FIG. 28 (e) shows a state in which the effect movable body 806 is moving upward in the front plane of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower plate full tank error display 703 displayed on the decorative design display device 208, the villager c5, and a part of “Do your best!” Are hidden by the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808 and are difficult to see (one Part is invisible). Further, the band image of the lower plate full tank error display 703 changes from the non-transmissive state to the transmissive state. Therefore, the character string “Do your best!” Displayed overlapping the lower plate full tank error display 703 becomes visible. As described above, the belt image of the lower plate full tank error display 703 is displayed by alternately changing between the non-transmissive state (transmittance 0%) and the transmissive state (transmittance 50%). The opacity and transmission of the band image may change gradually and continuously or may change stepwise.

  Further, the villager c5 and the character string “Do your best!” Are hidden from the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808, and then deleted from the decorative symbol display device 208. The villager c5 and “Do your best!” May be deleted together with the display of “continuous hit!” Displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  FIG. 29 shows a specific performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2-1 of the present embodiment. FIGS. 29A to 29F are effects executed subsequently to FIG. 28F, and are arranged in time series in this order.

  FIG. 29A shows a state in which the effect movable body 806 has moved in the plane in front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and stopped almost at the center in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, when the chance button 136 is operated a specified number of times within the operation reception period, the effect movable body 806 moves to approximately the center in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 which is the movement completion position. Yes. As a result, a part of the belt image of the lower pan full tank error display 703 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the entire character string “please remove the ball” are displayed on the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808. Hidden and invisible. Further, the band image of the lower pan full tank error display 703 is displayed by changing from the transparent state to the black non-transparent state. In addition to the lower plate full tank error display 703, the effect movable body 806 and the sub-display device 808 are used to display decoration symbols, hold icons, effects display (for example, villager c5, notice notice of change, pre-read notice notice), etc. At least a part of the display may be hidden. In addition, when at least a part of the lower pan full tank error display 703 is hidden by the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808, the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808 allow the decoration symbol, the hold icon, and the effect display (for example, Other indications such as villager c5, notice notice of the change, prefetch notice notice) may not be hidden. Further, when at least a part of the lower pan full tank error display 703 is hidden by the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808, it may be displayed on the sub display device 808 that the lower pan full tank error has occurred. In this case, the lower plate full tank error display 703 may be continuously displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the display state of the lower plate full tank error on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the sub display device 808 overlaps. A state in which only the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 808 displays the lower pan full error display may be included. In addition, when the lower pan full tank error display is displayed on either the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub display device 808, the lower pan full tank error display may not be displayed on the other display device. .

  Further, since the operation acceptance period has ended, the character string “continuous hit!” Displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is gradually erased, and the chance button 136 displayed on the sub display device 808 is simulated. The displayed image and the meter image indicating the operation reception period are deleted.

  In addition, after the villager c5 is erased from the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 808 starts to display the shrine c1 who has made a guts pose and the villager c5. The display start timings of the clan c1 and the villager c5 who made a guts pose in the sub display device 808 may be the same, or one of them may be the first.

  FIG. 29 (b) continuing from FIG. 29 (a) shows a state in which the lord c 1 and the villager c 5 that have made a guts pose are displayed on the sub display device 808. Further, the band image of the lower plate full tank error display 703 gradually changes from the non-transmissive state (transmittance 0%) to the transmissive state (transmittance 50%).

  FIG. 29 (c) continuing from FIG. 29 (b) shows a state in which the band image of the lower pan full tank error display 703 is changed to the non-transmissive state (transmittance 0%). In addition, the character string “continuous hit!” Displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is deleted.

  FIG. 29 (d) continuing from FIG. 29 (c) shows a state in which the fluctuation display of “decoration 7” in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c is started. At the start of the shaking fluctuation display, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are moved to approximately the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the fluctuation fluctuation display of the decorative symbols is started. Thus, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Since the effect movable body 806 remains stopped at the approximate center in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the left and right decorative symbols displayed in a swinging manner in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c In addition, all of the central decorative symbols that are swayed and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b are hidden by the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808 and cannot be visually recognized. Further, the lower pan full tank error display 703 is displayed on a layer in front of the decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. As a result, a part of the left and right decorative symbols that are displayed in a swinging manner in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c are hidden by the lower pan full error display 703 in addition to the effect movable body 806 and the sub display device 808. Therefore, the expectation that a special jackpot may be won in the special figure 1 variable game being executed without allowing the player to recognize which decorative symbols are displayed in a fluctuation manner in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. May be available to the player.

  FIG. 29 (e) continuing from FIG. 29 (d) shows a state in which the lower pan full tank error display 703 is changed to the transmissive state (transmittance 50%). Thereby, compared with the state shown in FIG.29 (d), the visibility of the decoration symbol which is fluctuating and fluctuated in the left middle right symbol display area 208a, 208b, 208c improves. Further, the Yoshimune c1 and the villager c5 displayed on the sub display device 808 are gradually deleted.

  FIG. 29 (f) continuing from FIG. 29 (e) shows a state after the effect movable body 806 starts moving toward the initial position. Due to the movement of the production movable body 806, the character string “please remove the ball” in the lower plate full tank error display 703 is visible. However, the lower tray full tank error display 703 is changed to the non-transmissive state (transmittance 0%). For this reason, the player may not be able to recognize the decorative symbols displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. Moreover, the movement start timing of the production movable body 806 may be after the Yoshimune c1 and the villager c5 start erasure, before the Yoshimune c1 and the villager c5 start to erase, It may be simultaneously with the start of erasure of the villager c5.

  FIG. 30 shows a specific performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2-1 of the present embodiment. 30 (a) to 30 (c) are effects executed subsequent to FIG. 29 (f), and are arranged in time series in this order.

  FIG. 30A shows a state in which the effect movable body 806 is moving toward the initial position. Also, the lower pan full tank error display 703 is changed to the transmissive state (transmittance 50%). Thus, the player can recognize that “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the sub display device 808, the Yoshimune c1 and the villager c5 are deleted, and the display of “CR Yoshimune” is displayed so that the display color gradually becomes darker.

  FIG. 30B shows a state in which the effect movable body 806 is stopped at the initial position. In the left / right / right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7” is displayed in a swinging manner. Further, the lower tray full tank error display 703 changes to the non-transmissive state (transmittance 0%). As a result, a part of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” displayed in a swinging manner in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c is hidden. The sub display device 808 displays “CR Yoshimune”.

  FIG.30 (c) has shown the state where the special figure 1 variable game was complete | finished. "Special Figure A" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and "Decoration 7-Decoration 7-Decoration 7" is stopped and displayed in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative design display apparatus 208. , It is informed that the big hit (15R special big hit) of “Special Figure A” has been won. In addition, the fourth symbol display area b1 is displayed in a predetermined color to notify that the special figure 1 variable game has ended. Also, the lower pan full tank error display 703 is changed to the transmissive state (transmittance 50%). The lower plate full tank error display 703 continues to be displayed until the lower plate full tank error is canceled (until the lower plate full tank sensor stops detecting the game ball).

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a decorative symbol display device 208 as a first display means, and a sub display device 808 as a second display means.
The decorative symbol display device 208 can display at least a lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 703 as a first display.
The sub display device 808 can display at least the lord c1 and the villager c5 as the second display.
At least a part of the lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 703 has at least low visibility when the sub display device 808 is in the first state.
The first state is a state where at least the lord c1 and the villager c5 are displayed by the sub display device 808.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the visibility of the lower pan full tank error display 703 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be low, and thus the decorative symbol display that is difficult to see is displayed. In some cases, the player can be focused on the device 208 and focused on the game. Further, since the visibility of the lower plate full tank error display 703 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be lowered, the player's line of sight is easier to see than the lower plate full tank error display 703, and the villager c5. May be able to point to.

The ball removal notification may be an error display for notifying that the storage tray (for example, the upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128) is full.
The ball removal notification may be hidden when the special figure variable game is finished. In this case, when the next special figure variable game is started, a display for informing the lower plate full tank error may be displayed again.
The ball removal notification may be hidden when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special figure display device. In this case, the display for informing the lower plate full tank error may be displayed again at the start of the big hit game, may not be displayed at the start of the big hit game, and may be displayed again during the round of the big hit game.
When displaying the ball removal notification once again after being hidden, the mode before being hidden and the mode when it is displayed again may be the same or different.
Even if the display of the ball removal notification on the decorative symbol display device 208 is not displayed, other display means (for example, an LED lamp, a sub display device 808, etc.) or sound output means (for example, a speaker) 120), it may be notified that a lower pan full error has occurred.

  Next, a pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2-2 of the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative portion 810, the light guide plate 812, and the decorative portion 814 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment 2-2. Thereafter, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, a surface closer to the player facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as “front surface”, and a surface farther from the player than the “front surface” is referred to as “rear surface”. Is written.

  As shown in FIG. 31, a decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative portion 810, a light guide plate 812 (second display means), and a decorative portion 814 are arranged in this order from the rear side to the front side. The decorative portion 814 is disposed on the rear side of the front stage 244. In FIG. 31, the decorative portions 810 and 814 are illustrated as a horizontally long flat plate shape. On the front surfaces of the decorative portions 810 and 814, for example, decorative members, lamps, and the like molded in a predetermined shape with a resin or the like are installed. Further, the decorative portion 810 has an opening 810a having a horizontally long rectangular shape. The decoration unit 810 is arranged so that the opening 810 a overlaps the screen of the decoration symbol display device 208. The area of the opening 810a is smaller than the area of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. For this reason, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden by the decoration unit 810. Of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a part that is visually recognized through the opening 810a (a part surrounded by a dotted line in the figure) is an area that is visible to the player. Further, the frame area 805 surrounding the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not visually recognized by the player.

  The light guide plate 812 is made of, for example, acrylic resin. A plurality of LED lamps (not shown) are arranged on the side surface of the light guide plate 812. A lens cut having a predetermined pattern is formed on the rear surface of the light guide plate 812. As a result, the light beam incident on the side surface of the light guide plate 812 from the LED lamp is reflected to the player side by the lens cut formed on the rear surface of the light guide plate 812 and is emitted from the light guide plate 812. Light is emitted from the light guide plate 812 in a predetermined color (for example, red, green, blue) to a predetermined pattern (for example, a pattern 705 of the Tono-sama face (hereinafter referred to as Tono-sama's face 705 as shown in FIG. 31)). As seen by the player. As a result, a predetermined pattern is displayed on the light guide plate 812. In this example, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 812 is one type of Tonosama's face 705, but a plurality of patterns may be displayed on the light guide plate 812. Further, the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 812 may be varied depending on the pattern of the LED lamp to be lit. Further, the pattern (light emission pattern) displayed on the light guide plate 812 may be varied depending on the lens cut pattern formed on the light guide plate 812. Further, in this example, when the LED lamp is not lit, the player can visually recognize what is arranged behind the light guide plate 812 such as the decorative portion 810 and the decorative symbol display device 208. Note that the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 812 may be visible to the player even when the LED lamp is not lit, may be easily visible, or may be difficult to visually recognize. , It may be invisible.

  A decorative portion 814 is disposed on the front side of the light guide plate 812. The decorative portion 814 has a horizontally long rectangular opening 814a. The decorative portion 814 is disposed so that the opening 814a and the front surface of the light guide plate 812 overlap. The area of the opening 814a is smaller than the surface area of the light guide plate 812. For this reason, a part of the light guide plate 812 is hidden by the decorative portion 814. A portion of the surface of the light guide plate 812 that is visually recognized through the opening 814a (a portion surrounded by a dotted line in the figure) is a display region that is visible to the player. For this reason, the outer peripheral part 812a (outside the dotted line in the figure) surrounding the display area of the light guide plate 812 is not visible to the player. Further, in this example, the area other than the pattern in the portion of the surface of the light guide plate 812 that is visually recognized through the opening 814a is not limited to light when the LED lamp emits light. Those arranged on the rear side of the light guide plate 812, such as 208, are visible or easily visible to the player.

  The decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative portion 810, the light guide plate 812, and the decorative portion 814 are installed in the rendering device 206. A plurality of effect movable bodies such as effect movable bodies 224 and 800 (see FIG. 13) may be disposed between the decoration unit 810 and the light guide plate 812. In addition, a plurality of effect movable bodies may be arranged between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate 812. In addition, a transparent plate formed of a transparent resin or the like may be disposed between the light guide plate 812 and the decorative portion 814. One or more effect movable bodies (for example, the effect movable body 806) may be disposed between the light guide plate 812 and the decorative portion 814. In addition, a transparent plate formed of a transparent resin or the like may be disposed on the front side of the effect movable body.

  Next, a display example displayed by the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate 812 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a schematic view of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative portion 810, the light guide plate 812, and the decorative portion 814 as viewed from the player side.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (a), a ton-like face 705 displayed on the light guide plate 812 is visually recognized through the opening 814a of the decorative portion 814. In addition, a part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visually recognized through the opening 810a of the decorative portion 810.

  FIG. 32B shows a state in which an effect is actually executed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 32C is a diagram showing the decorative portions 810 and 814 and the light guide plate 812 removed from FIG. 32B. A region surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 32C indicates a display region of the decorative symbol display device 208 that can be actually visually recognized by the player through the opening 810a.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (c), “decoration 4-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped in the left middle right symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c of the ornamental symbol display device 208. Further, fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are provided above the right short side (vertical side) of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, below the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2, hold number display areas 712a and 712b are provided, respectively. In the hold icon display area 710, hold icons a1, a2, and a3 are displayed, respectively. When the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect as shown in FIG. 32 (c), if the Tono-like face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812, the player is informed as shown in FIG. 32 (b). Is visible. Since the Tono-like face 705 is displayed on the transparent light guide plate 812 with light emission in a predetermined color, it is displayed so that the rear side is transmitted (the rear side is visible). For this reason, in the image or design displayed on the decorative design display device 208, the visibility of the portion that overlaps the lord's face 705 is relatively low, and the visibility of the portion that does not overlap the lord's face 705 is low. It is relatively high.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), the entire fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 and the reserved number display area 712a and almost the entire reserved number display area 712b (part where the reserved number is displayed in numbers). Is displayed so as not to overlap with Tonosama's face 705. For this reason, even when the Tono-like face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812, the player can reduce the visibility of the fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 and the reserved number display areas 712a and 712b. In some cases, it is possible to easily recognize whether or not a special figure variable game is executed and the number of special figure holds.

Positions where the whole or part of the hold number display area 712a (displays the hold number of the special figure 1) and the whole or part of the hold number display area 712b (displays the hold number of the special figure 2) do not overlap with the face 705 May be displayed.
At least one of the hold icon and the number-of-holds display areas 712 a and 712 b may be displayed at a position where it overlaps with the face 705 of the lord, and the other may be displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the face 705 of the lord. In addition, both the hold icon and the hold number display areas 712a and 712b may be displayed at a position overlapping the Tonosama face 705, or may be arranged at a position where both do not overlap.

  Next, specific effects of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIGS. 33A to 33G show, in this order, the specific effects in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in chronological order.

  33 to 34 show the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative portions 810 and 814 and the light guide plate 812 are not shown. In addition, when the LED lamp disposed on the side surface of the light guide plate 812 emits light and the noble face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812, the noble face 705 is shown on the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 33 (a) shows that the decorative pattern “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c at the center of the rectangular display area of the ornamental symbol display device 208 after the special figure 2 variable game is completed. Is displayed in a stopped state, and it is notified that the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a special jackpot. Since the special figure 2 variable game is finished and the special figure variable games of both special figure 1 and special figure 2 are not executed, both of the four fourth symbol display areas b1 and b2 are filled with a predetermined color. .

  The gaming state at the time point shown in FIG. 33A is a special figure high probability common figure high probability state (a probability variation state with electric support). For this reason, “probably changing” is displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is informed that it is in a special figure high probability state (probability changing state).

  Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays only the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 in the normal figure high probability state (during electric support). For this reason, in the hold icon display area 710, hold icons a11, a12, a13, and a14 indicating the number of holds in FIG. 2 are displayed in this order from the left. The hold icons a11, a12, a13, and a14 correspond to the first to fourth hold orders in this order. That is, the hold icon a11 indicates the first hold (the first hold), the hold icon a12 indicates the second hold, the hold icon a13 indicates the third hold, The hold icon a14 indicates the fourth hold in the hold order. The display mode of the hold icons a11 to a14 is a white circle. In addition, since the number of holds in the special figure 1 at the present time is four, “4” is displayed in the hold number display area 712a, and the number of hold in the special figure 2 is four, so the number in the hold number display area 712b. Is displayed as “4”. Note that the pachinko machine 100 may display a hold icon indicating hold in FIG. 1 in the hold icon display area 710 even during power support.

  FIG. 33 (b) continuing from FIG. 33 (a) shows a state in which it is informed that the special jackpot has been won in the special figure 2 variable game ended in FIG. 33 (a). In the special jackpot (the jackpot of the special figure A), the game state shifts to a probable change state (special chart high probability state) after the big jackpot game. The symbol display areas 208a to 208c disappear from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbol is not stopped. The hold icon display area 710 also disappears, and the hold icon is not displayed. Instead, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes an effect display area 208d, and a special big win winning notification effect is executed by the character string “probability big hit”.

  FIG. 33 (c) continuing from FIG. 33 (b) shows a state in which the big hit game is started. When the big hit game is started, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c disappear from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays the hold icon in the hold icon display area 710 even during the big hit game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 33C, the first round (1R) of 15R big hit game is executed. In the effect display area 208d that extends over the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a background image of the beach is displayed. The upper right of the effect display area 208d is a round number display area 717 for displaying the number of rounds in which the big hit game is being executed. Here, “1R” is displayed and the first round of the big hit game is being executed. It is reported that there is. The top left of the effect display area 208d is a big hit type display area 718 for displaying the big hit type. Here, “decoration 7” is displayed to notify that the big hit is a 15R special big hit.

  FIG. 33 (d) continuing from FIG. 33 (c) shows a state in which the big hit game has entered the sixth round (6R). In the round number display area 717, “6R” is displayed to notify that the sixth round of the big hit game is being executed.

  FIG. 33 (e) following FIG. 33 (d) shows a state in which the Tono-like face 705 (second display) not displayed in FIGS. 33 (a) to 33 (d) is displayed on the light guide plate 812. Is shown. By displaying the Tono-sama's face 705 on the light guide plate 812, the visibility of the display by the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, part of the background image, hold icon, round number display, jackpot type display) is reduced. Note that since the time point shown in FIG. 33 (e) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6R” is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  In the present embodiment, the Tono-like face 705 displayed on the light guide plate 812 is determined as a result of the special figure prefetching processing that the prefetching result for the special figure variable game that is currently held has a big hit (so-called Only when it is determined that there is a reserved villa. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The pre-determination result (special drawing prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. The special figure prefetching process is executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. For example, in the special chart prefetching process executed up to the time shown in FIG. 33 (a), if there is a big hit in the hold, the Tono-sama's face 705 is displayed to indicate that there is a reserved game in the big hit game. To inform. In the present embodiment, the Tono-sama's face 705 is used as a premier effect (effect of confirming a big hit) for notifying that there is a big hit in the hold.

  In FIG. 33 (f) continuing from FIG. 33 (e), a winning ball based on the winning of the gaming ball to the variable winning opening 234 during the big hit game is paid out to the lower plate 128, the lower plate 128 becomes full, It shows the state where the bottom pan full tank error has occurred. When a lower pan full tank error occurs, a lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 (first display) is displayed to the left of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower plate full tank error display 704 includes a rectangular frame and a character string “please remove the sphere” displayed in the frame. The lower pan full tank error display 704 is displayed by the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information on the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. The lower plate full tank error display 704 corresponds to an operation request notification for requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132. The lower pan full tank error display 704 has a relatively low visibility when the Tono-like face 705 is displayed on the light guide plate 812 disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower plate full tank error display 704 is displayed until the game ball (prize ball) stored in the lower plate 128 is discharged to, for example, a dollar box by operating the ball discharge lever 132 and the lower plate full tank error is canceled. Continue to be.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 33 (f), the display color of the hold icon a13 is changed from white (indicated by a right-upward hatching in the figure). The pachinko machine 100 changes the display color of the hold icon a <b> 13 to notify that the prefetching result related to the special figure 2 variable game with the hold order of 3 is a big hit. The hold icon a13 whose display color has changed during the big hit game is used as a premier effect (a big hit determination effect) for notifying that there is a big hit in the hold. In addition, since the time shown in FIG. 33 (f) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6R” is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  FIG. 33 (g) following FIG. 33 (f) shows a state in which the display color of the hold icon a13 is further changed from the time shown in FIG. 33 (f) (indicated by cross-hatching in the figure). As described above, in the premier effect executed using the hold icon during the big hit game, the display color of the hold icon used for the premier effect is changed as needed. The change in the display color of the hold icon may be, for example, continuously changing from blue to green or red, or may be changed so that the hold icon is lit. There may be. In addition, since the time shown in FIG. 33 (g) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6R” is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  FIG. 34 shows a specific performance of the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 2-2 of the present embodiment. 34 (a) to (c) are effects executed subsequent to FIG. 33 (g), and are arranged in time series in this order.

  FIG. 34A shows a state in which the change of the display color of the hold icon a13 has been completed. The hold icon a13 is then displayed in the color when the display color change is completed until the corresponding hold is digested and erased. Note that the display mode of the hold icon during a special game (for example, during a big hit game) is different from the display mode of the hold icon during a normal game (for example, during probability change, short time, special figure low-precision normal figure low-probability state, etc.). You may make it let. In addition, since the time shown in FIG. 33 (g) is the sixth round in the big hit game, “6R” is displayed in the round number display area 717.

  FIG. 34 (b) continuing from FIG. 34 (a) shows a state in which the LED lamp arranged on the side surface of the light guide plate 812 is extinguished and the Tono-like face 705 displayed on the light guide plate 812 is erased. Yes. In this example, the Tonosama's face 705 is erased after the change in the display color of the hold icon used for the premier effect is completed. It should be noted that the erasure timing of Tonosama's face 705 may be earlier than the change completion timing of the hold icon, may be at the same time, or may be later. In addition, since the Tono-sama's face 705 is deleted, the visibility of the lower pan full tank error display 704, a part of the background image, the hold icon, the round number display, and the big hit type display is improved. Note that the Tonosama face 705 may be displayed across a plurality of rounds.

  Further, the character string “please remove the ball” included in the lower tray full tank error display 704 is displayed in black, for example. The sea portion of the background image displayed on the back of the character string is displayed in dark blue, for example. Since the black character string “please remove the sphere” is displayed so as to overlap the dark blue color, it is difficult to see the character string that is a part of the lower pan full error display 704. Thus, depending on the color of the background image, it may be difficult to see part of the lower pan full error display 704.

  FIG. 34 (c) continuing from FIG. 34 (b) shows a state in which the sixth round of the big hit game has been completed and entered the interval between rounds. The interval between rounds means a period from the closing of the variable winning opening 234 in one round to the opening of the variable winning opening 234 in the next round of the round in the big hit game. In the interval between rounds, the round number display area 717 is erased and the round number is not displayed. In addition, the lower pan full tank error display 704 continues to be displayed even during the interval between rounds. In addition, Tonosama's face 705 may be continuously displayed in the interval between rounds, may not be displayed in the interval between rounds, and may be displayed again after moving to the next round. In addition, the round number display (for example, 6R) of the round which ended during the interval between rounds may be continuously displayed, and the round number display of the round which starts at the same time as or after the variable winning opening 234 is opened ( For example, 7R) may be displayed. In addition, a round number display (for example, 7R) to be started next may be displayed at the same time as or after closing the variable prize opening 234 (for example, the closing of the variable prize opening 234 in the sixth round).

  FIG. 34 (d) continuing from FIG. 34 (c) shows a state in which the seventh round of the big hit game is started. Since the interval between rounds is over and the seventh round is started, a round number display area 717 is provided and “7R” is displayed.

  FIG. 34 (e) continuing from FIG. 34 (d) shows a state in which the lower pan full tank error is released. For example, the player operates the ball discharge lever 132 to discharge the prize ball (game ball) stored in the lower plate 128 to the dollar box, so that the lower plate full tank error is canceled. As a result, the lower pan full error display 704 is erased.

  FIG. 34 (f) continuing from FIG. 34 (e) shows a state immediately before the fifteenth round which is the final round of the jackpot game is finished. “15R” is displayed in the number-of-rounds display area 717 to notify that the 15th round of the big hit game is being executed.

  FIG. 34 (g) continuing from FIG. 34 (f) shows a state in which the big hit game is finished. As a result of determining whether or not the latest special figure 2 variable game is successful is a special big hit (special figure A big hit), the gaming state becomes a special figure high probability state (probability changing state) after the big hit game is over. Also, the gaming state at the end of the last special figure 2 variable game is also a special figure high probability state. For this reason, the effect display area 208d expanded over the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “Continue change probability!” To notify that the gaming state shifts to the special figure high probability state. At the end of the big hit game, the hold icon display area 710 disappears and the hold icon is not displayed. Note that the hold icon may be continuously displayed even when the big hit game ends.

It should be noted that the lower plate full tank error display 704 may be hidden during the round interval. In addition, when a lower pan full tank error occurs, an error notification by voice may be performed together with the lower pan full tank error display 704.
Further, the Tonosama face 705 may be displayed so as to be repeatedly turned on and off (by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LED lamps provided on the side surfaces of the light guide plate 812). Also, Tonosama's face 705 may be displayed so as to blink (flashing a plurality of LED lamps). In addition, Tonosama's face 705 may continue to be displayed with a predetermined luminance (a plurality of LED lamps continue to be lit with a predetermined luminance).

In addition, Tonosama's face 705 may be displayed in a single color, may be displayed so that the color continuously changes over time, or may be displayed in gradation.
Further, when a serious error (for example, an error that needs to be canceled by a game shop clerk) occurs, the face 705 of Tonosama may be deleted.
Even if a serious error occurs, the face 705 of Tonosama may be continuously displayed.
When a serious error occurs, the round number display on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be changed to another display.
Further, when a serious error occurs, all the displays including the round number display may be hidden, and only a display for notifying that a serious error has occurred may be displayed. Further, even when a serious error occurs, the round number display may be continued.
In addition, if a power interruption / recovery occurs during a game (during a big hit or during a symbol change) (for example, when an electrical system abnormality such as a power supply voltage drop due to a lightning strike occurs, and then the power is restored), the specified timing The effect display may be hidden until the next round starts during the big hit round, and the next fluctuation starts when the symbols are changing, and a power return display such as “power is being restored” may be displayed. In addition, a message such as “Please launch a ball” may be displayed. In this case, if an error has occurred, it may be displayed that an error has occurred. Further, only serious errors may be displayed. In addition, error display is not performed, and another display means (for example, LED lamp, sub display device 808, etc.) or sound output means (for example, speaker 120) may be notified that an error has occurred. Good.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a decorative symbol display device 208 as a first display means, and a light guide plate 812 as a second display means.
The decorative symbol display device 208 is capable of displaying at least a lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 as a first display.
The sub display device 808 can display at least the Tonosama face 705 as the second display.
At least a part of the lower plate full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 has at least low visibility when the light guide plate 812 is in the first state.
The first state is a state where at least the Tono-like face 705 is displayed by the light guide plate 812.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the visibility of the lower pan full tank error display 704 displayed on the decorative design display device 208 may be lowered, so that the decorative design display in which an invisible error display is made. In some cases, the player can be focused on the device 208 and focused on the game. Further, the visibility of the lower plate full tank error display 704 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be lowered, so that the player's line of sight is more easily visible than the lower plate full tank error display 703. There are cases where it can be directed.

  Note that in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays, as a first display, a later-described alerting notification effect 722, a right-handed notification effect 724, an attention alert notification effect 750, and an attention alert notification effect. 772 and the first display 790 may be displayed. Further, the sub display device 808 displays, as second displays, pre-read notice notification effects 730 and 740 described later, an electric long long opening effect, an electric long long false effect 760, a user level notification effect 775, and a second display 792. It may be displayable.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 34 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
First display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
Second display means (for example, the sub display device 808 and the light guide plate 812);
A game machine equipped with
The first display means includes a first display (for example, lower pan full error display (ball removal notification) 703, 704, a warning notification effect 722, a right-hand notification notification 724, a warning notification effect 750, a warning notification. Production 772, first display 790) can be displayed at least,
The second display means is a second display (for example, production display, Tono-sama c1, villager c5, Tono-sama's face 705, pre-reading notice notification effects 730, 740, electric-chu-long opening effect, electric-chu-long opening false effect 760. , The user level notification effect 775, the second display 792) can be displayed at least,
At least a part of the first display has at least low visibility when the second display means is in the first state,
The first state is a state where at least the second display is displayed on the second display means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be low, the player tries to recognize the notification content by the first display. It may be possible to focus on the means and concentrate the player on the game. Further, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be lowered, the player's line of sight can be directed to the second display that is easier to see than the first display. There are cases where it is possible.

The first display means may be capable of displaying one or a plurality of displays different from the first display.
The second display means may be capable of displaying one or a plurality of displays different from the second display.
The second display means may be capable of displaying only the second display.
All or part of the first display may be at least low in visibility when the second display means is in the first state.
The first state may be a state in which only the second display is displayed by the second display unit.
The first state may be a state in which one or a plurality of displays including the second display are displayed by the second display unit.
At least a part of the first display may have at least low visibility when the second display means is in the first state.
At least a part of the first display may be in a state where visibility is at least low when the second display means is in the first state.
The first state may be a state where at least the second display is displayed by the second display means.

(2) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is a display relating to the game (for example, lower tray full tank error display (ball removal notification) 703, 704),
The second display is an effect display (for example, an effect display, Tonosama c1, Villager c5, Tonosama's face 705).
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, since the display related to the game displayed on the first display means becomes difficult to see due to the effect display displayed on the second display means, the effect display displayed on the second display means May be noticed by the player.

(3) The pachinko machine 100,
At least a part of the first display has at least higher visibility than the first state when the second display means is in the second state,
The second state is a state in which the second display is not displayed at least on the second display means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, since the visibility of the first display is higher in the second state than in the first state, the first display is displayed in the first state. It may be possible to make it easier for the player to guess that the player is present.

Part or all of the first display may be higher in visibility than the first state when the second display means is in the second state.
Part or all of the first display may be higher in visibility than one or more states including the first state when the second display means is in the second state. .
Part or all of the first display is more visible than the first state when the second display means is in the second state, and more than one or more states different from the first state. Also, the visibility may be low.
The second state may be a state where one or more displays including the second display are not displayed on the second display means.
The second state may be a state in which only the second display is not displayed on the second display means.

(4) The pachinko machine 100,
The first region is provided at least in a position overlapping at least with the second region in the first state,
The first area is at least a part of the first display means (for example, an area for displaying a game display, an image display area, a frame area 805),
The second area is at least a part of the second display means (for example, a display area for displaying an effect display, an image display area, a frame portion 807, and an outer peripheral portion 812a).
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display unit may be lowered, so that the player can focus on the first display unit and concentrate on the game. There are cases where it is possible. Further, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the first display means may be lowered, the player's line of sight can be directed to the second display that is easier to see than the first display. There are cases where it is possible.

The first area may be only a partial area or the entire area of the first display means.
The second area may be only a part or all of the second display means.
The first region may be provided at a position overlapping only with the second region in the first state.
In the first state, the first region may be one that overlaps with one or more regions including the second region.

(5) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is an error display (for example, lower pan full error display 703, 704).
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, in the first state, by reducing the visibility of the error display, an effort can be made to make the player recognize the error display so that the player can watch the error display carefully. There are cases where it is possible. Moreover, it may be possible to prevent the second display (effect display) from being missed due to the error display being displayed.

(6) The pachinko machine 100,
The second display means is provided at least on the front side of the first display means,
The second display is displayed at least in front of the first display.

According to this configuration, in the first state, the second display may be displayed on the front side of the first display, so that the player can easily focus the second display on the player. . In the first state, the first display may be displayed on the rear side of the second display so that the player can carefully watch the first display.
(A1) The game stand according to this embodiment is
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
From the first position (for example, the initial position of the effect movable body 806 shown in FIG. 28 (a), the position of the effect movable body 806 shown in FIG. 28 (e), the position of the shielding means shown in 17 (b)) to the second position. (For example, the position of the effect movable body 806 shown in FIG. 28 (f), the position where part of the effect movable body 806 overlaps part of the hold icon display area 710, the position of the shielding means shown in FIG. 17 (c)) ) Movable means (for example, effect movable body 806 shown in FIGS. 28 to 30, shielding means shown in FIGS. 17 to 19),
A game machine equipped with
The display means is image display means,
The movable means is a movable means for production,
One of the plural types of displays is a dish full tank error display (for example, a lower dish full tank error display 703 shown in FIGS. 28 to 30) (hereinafter referred to as “first display”).
The second position is a position where the movable means is located in front of the display means (for example, see FIG. 28 (f), FIG. 17 (c)),
The second position is a position where the movable means overlaps at least a part of the first display (see, for example, FIGS. 28 (f) and 17 (c)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A2)
A gaming machine according to (A1),
A storage tray (for example, a lower tray 128) that can store game balls is provided,
The first display is a display that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray (for example, an operation request notification that requests the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A3)
(A1) or (A2) game machine according to
In the first position (for example, the initial position of the effect movable body 806 shown in FIG. 28A and the position of the shielding means shown in FIG. 17B), the movable means does not overlap the first display. Position,
A game stand characterized by that.
(A4)
(A1) thru | or the game stand as described in any one of (A3),
The first position is a position where the movable means is located in front of the display means (see, for example, FIGS. 28 and 17).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A5)
(A1) to (A4) according to any one of (A4),
When the movable means is located at the second position (for example, when the effect movable body is located at the position shown in FIG. 28F), part of the effect movable body 806 is part of the hold icon display area 710. When it is located at the overlapping position, the moving means is located at the first position when the shielding means is located at the position shown in FIG. When the effect movable body 806 is located at the position shown in FIG. 28E when it is located at the initial position shown in a), and when the shielding means is located at the position shown in FIG. The visibility of one display is low,
A game stand characterized by that.
(A6)
(A1) thru | or the game machine as described in any one of (A5),
The movable means is a means capable of moving from the second position to the first position (see, for example, FIGS. 29 to 30 and FIGS. 17 to 19).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A7)
(A1) thru | or the game machine as described in any one of (A6),
The movable means moves from the first position through the second position to a third position (for example, the movement completion position of the effect movable body 806 shown in FIG. 29A, and the shielding means shown in FIG. 17H). Is a means that can be moved to
A game stand characterized by that.
(A8)
(A7) is a gaming table,
The third position (for example, the movement completion position of the effect movable body 806 shown in FIG. 29A) is a position where the movable means is located in front of the display means.
The third position is a position where the movable means overlaps at least a part of the first display (see, for example, FIG. 29A).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A9)
(A7) is a gaming table,
The third position (for example, the position of the shielding means shown in FIG. 17 (h)) is a position where the movable means is located in front of the display means,
The third position is a position where the movable means does not overlap with the first display (for example, see FIG. 17 (h)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A10)
(A1) to (A9) according to any one of (A9),
The movable means is means provided to be movable in front of the display means (see, for example, FIGS. 28 to 30 and FIGS. 17 to 19).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A11)
(A1) thru | or the game stand as described in any one of (A10),
The movable means is means capable of moving to the second position even when the first display is displayed (for example, see FIG. 28 (f) and FIG. 17 (c)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A12)
(A1) thru | or the game machine as described in any one of (A11),
The movable means is means capable of moving to the second position even when the first display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(A13)
(A1) thru / or (A12) a game stand given in any 1 paragraph,
The first display is one of a plurality of types of errors (for example, front frame door opening error, lower pan full error, radio wave sensor error, magnetic sensor error, and ball shortage error) (for example, lower pan full error) ) Is a display corresponding to
A game stand characterized by that.
(A14)
(A1) thru | or the game machine as described in any one of (A13),
One display among the plurality of types of display is an effect display (for example, display of a hold icon, display of a character image) (hereinafter referred to as “second display”).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A15)
(A14) A gaming machine according to (A14),
The second display is a display of a hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(A16)
(A1) thru | or the game stand as described in any one of (A15),
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A17)
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
From the first position (for example, the initial position of the effect movable body 806 shown in FIG. 28 (a), the position of the effect movable body 806 shown in FIG. 28 (e), the position of the shielding means shown in 17 (b)) to the second position. (For example, the position of the effect movable body 806 shown in FIG. 28 (f), the position where part of the effect movable body 806 overlaps part of the hold icon display area 710, the position of the shielding means shown in FIG. 17 (c)) ) Movable means (for example, effect movable body 806 shown in FIGS. 28 to 30, shielding means shown in FIGS. 17 to 19),
A game machine equipped with
The display means is image display means,
The movable means is a movable means for production,
One of the plural types of displays is a dish full tank error display (for example, a message “please remove the ball” shown in FIG. 21, a lower dish full tank error display 703 shown in FIGS. 28 to 30, FIG. 33). To lower tray full error display 704) (hereinafter referred to as "first display") shown in FIG.
One display among the plurality of types of display is effect display (for example, display of a hold icon, display of a background image, display of an aura image, display of a decorative pattern, display of a character image) (hereinafter, “second display”). Display "), and
At least a part of the first display is a display that overlaps with at least a part of the second display (for example, FIGS. 21B to 21D and FIGS. 28E to 28E). (F), FIG. 33 (f)-(g), FIG. 30, FIG. 34 (b)-(d) reference),
The first display is a display that is displayed in front of the second display (for example, the front layer),
The second position is a position where the movable means is located in front of the display means (for example, see FIG. 28 (f), FIG. 17 (c)),
The second position is a position where the movable means overlaps at least a part of the first display (for example, a position overlapping the entire first display (see FIG. 17C)). Position that overlaps with a part of the text “Pull out the ball” (see FIG. 28 (f)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(A18)
(A17) A game machine according to (A17),
A storage tray (for example, a lower tray 128) that can store game balls is provided,
The first display is a display that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray (for example, an operation request notification that requests the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A19)
(A17) or (A18) according to the game machine,
In the first position (for example, the initial position of the effect movable body 806 shown in FIG. 28A and the position of the shielding means shown in FIG. 17B), the movable means does not overlap the first display. Position,
A game stand characterized by that.
(A20)
(A17) to (A19) according to any one of (A19),
The first position is a position where the movable means is located in front of the display means (see, for example, FIGS. 28 and 17).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A21)
(A17) It is a game stand given in any 1 paragraph of (A20),
When the movable means is located at the second position (for example, when the effect movable body is located at the position shown in FIG. 28F), part of the effect movable body 806 is part of the hold icon display area 710. When it is located at the overlapping position, the moving means is located at the first position when the shielding means is located at the position shown in FIG. When the effect movable body 806 is located at the position shown in FIG. 28E when it is located at the initial position shown in a), and when the shielding means is located at the position shown in FIG. The visibility of one display is low,
A game stand characterized by that.
(A22)
(A17) to (A21) according to any one of (A21),
The movable means is a means capable of moving from the second position to the first position (see, for example, FIGS. 29 to 30 and FIGS. 17 to 19).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A23)
(A17) It is a game stand given in any 1 paragraph of (A23),
The movable means moves from the first position through the second position to a third position (for example, the movement completion position of the effect movable body 806 shown in FIG. 29A, and the shielding means shown in FIG. 17H). Is a means that can be moved to
A game stand characterized by that.
(A24)
(A23) is a gaming machine according to
The third position (for example, the movement completion position of the effect movable body 806 shown in FIG. 29A) is a position where the movable means is located in front of the display means.
The third position is a position where the movable means overlaps at least a part of the first display (for example, a position where it overlaps the entirety of the characters “please remove the ball” (FIG. 29 ( a) see)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(A25)
(A23) is a gaming machine according to
The third position (for example, the position of the shielding means shown in FIG. 17 (h)) is a position where the movable means is located in front of the display means,
The third position is a position where the movable means does not overlap with the first display (for example, see FIG. 17 (h)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A26)
(A17) It is a game stand given in any 1 paragraph of (A25),
The movable means is means provided to be movable in front of the display means (see, for example, FIGS. 28 to 30 and FIGS. 17 to 19).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A27)
(A17) It is a game stand given in any 1 paragraph of (A26),
The movable means is means capable of moving to the second position even when the first display is displayed (for example, see FIG. 28 (f) and FIG. 17 (c)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A28)
(A17) to (A27) according to any one of (A27),
The movable means is means capable of moving to the second position even when the first display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(A29)
(A17) to (A28) according to any one of (A),
The first display is one of a plurality of types of errors (for example, front frame door opening error, lower pan full error, radio wave sensor error, magnetic sensor error, and ball shortage error) (for example, lower pan full error) ) Is a display corresponding to
A game stand characterized by that.
(A30)
(A17) to (A29) according to any one of (A29),
Provided with operating means (for example, a chance button 136) provided at a position operable by the player;
A game stand characterized by that.
(A31)
(A30) is a gaming machine according to
The movable means is configured to move from the first position to the second position in response to the operation means being operated.
A game stand characterized by that.
(A32)
(A30) or (A31),
The second display (for example, the aura images shown in FIGS. 21B to 21D) is a display that can be displayed after the operation unit is operated.
A game stand characterized by that.
(A33)
(A17) to (A31) according to any one of (A),
The second display is a display of a hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(A34)
(A17) to (A31) according to any one of (A),
The second display is a background display (for example, a display of a beach background image shown in FIG. 34C).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A35)
(A17) to (A34) according to any one of (A34),
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

The second display means may be provided in front of the first display means.
The second display means includes one or a plurality of parts including the first display means (for example, display means, rendering means, movable means, winning means (variable winning means, starting winning means, etc.), front frame door, transparent plate It may be provided in front of the member.
The second display means is provided in front of the first display means and is different from the first display means (for example, display means different from the first and second display means, rendering means, movable means, winning a prize) It may be provided behind the means (variable winning means, starting winning means, etc.), front frame door, transparent plate member, etc.
The second display may be displayed in front of the first display.
The second display may be displayed on the front side of the first display, and may be displayed on the rear side of one or more displays different from the first and second displays.
The second display may be displayed in front of one or more displays including the first display.

(7) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display means is provided with at least a first display area (for example, an image display area, an area for displaying a display relating to a game),
The second display means is provided with at least a second display area (for example, an image display area, a display area for displaying an effect display).
The first display area can display at least the first display,
The second display area can display at least the second display,
The third display area is provided at least in a position overlapping the fourth display area in the first state,
The third display area is at least a part of the first display area,
The fourth display area is at least a part of the second display area.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, in the first state, the third display area and the fourth display area are provided at the overlapping position, so that the player can display the first display displayed in the first display area. Can be made to look carefully. In some cases, the player can be focused on the second display displayed in the second display area.

The first display means may be provided with only the first display area.
The first display means may be provided with one or a plurality of display areas including the first display area.
The second display means may be provided with only the second display area.
The second display means may be provided with one or a plurality of display areas including the second display area.
The first display area may be capable of displaying one or more displays including the first display.
The first display area may be capable of displaying only the first display.
The second display area may be capable of displaying one or more displays including the second display.
The second display area may be capable of displaying only the second display.
The third display area may be a part or all of the first display area.
The fourth display area may be a part or all of the second display area.
A part or all of the third display area may be provided at least at a position overlapping with part or all of the fourth display area in the first state.

(8) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is information more important to the player than the second display (for example, information requesting operation of a store clerk or player of a game store (ball removal notification, error notification, chance button press) Request notification etc.)
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, a part of the display (first display) including information having high importance for the player has a lower visibility due to a part of the effect display (second display). In some cases, the player's line of sight can be easily directed to the display means.

The first display may be a display including only information that is more important to the player than the second display.
The first display may be a display including only a plurality of pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display.
The first display includes one or more pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more pieces of information that are less important than the second display (for example, a character image or background) ) May be included.
The first display includes one or more information items that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more information items that are less important than one or more displays different from the second display (e.g., Display including a character image and background).

(9) The pachinko machine 100,
An operation means (for example, a ball discharge lever 132) provided at least at a position where the player can operate;
The first display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, there is a case where it is possible to concentrate and entertain the player on the effect display by reducing the visibility of at least a part of the notification prompting the operation of the operation means by the effect display.

The operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate.
The first display may include only a notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means.
The first display may include one or a plurality of notifications including a notification prompting the player to operate the operation means.
(B1)
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
Movable means (for example, production movable body 806 shown in FIGS. 28 to 30, shielding means shown in FIGS. 17 to 19),
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plural types of displays is a dish full tank error display (for example, a message “please remove the ball” shown in FIG. 21, a lower dish full tank error display 703 shown in FIGS. 28 to 30, FIG. 33). To lower plate full tank error display 704) shown in FIG.
The movable means is a second position (for example, the position of the effect movable body 806 shown in FIG. 28 (f), the position where a part of the effect movable body 806 overlaps with a part of the hold icon display area 710, FIG. ) Which is movable to the position of the shielding means shown in FIG.
The second position is a position in front of the display means;
A portion of the movable means located in the second position overlaps at least a portion of the dish full tank error display;
A game stand characterized by that.
(B2)
A gaming machine according to (B1),
A storage tray (for example, a lower tray 128) that can store game balls is provided,
The dish full tank error display is a display prompting the player to discharge the game ball from the storage dish (for example, an operation request notification requesting the player to operate the ball discharge lever 132).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B3)
A gaming machine according to (B1) or (B2),
The movable means is a first position (for example, the initial position of the effect movable body 806 shown in FIG. 28A, the position of the effect movable body 806 shown in FIG. 28E, and the shielding means shown in 17B). Position) from the position) to the second position,
The movable means located at the first position does not overlap with the dish full tank error display;
A game stand characterized by that.
(B4)
(B3) is a game machine,
The first position is a position in front of the display means (see, for example, FIGS. 28 and 17).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B5)
The game stand according to (B3) or (B4),
When the movable means is located at the second position (for example, when the effect movable body is located at the position shown in FIG. 28F), part of the effect movable body 806 is part of the hold icon display area 710. When it is located at the overlapping position, the moving means is located at the first position when the shielding means is located at the position shown in FIG. When the effect movable body 806 is located at the position shown in FIG. 28E when it is located at the initial position shown in FIG. 28A, and when the shielding means is located at the position shown in FIG. Low visibility of full tank error display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(B6)
(B3) to (B5) according to any one of the game tables,
The movable means is a means capable of moving from the second position to the first position (see, for example, FIGS. 29 to 30 and FIGS. 17 to 19).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B7)
(B3) to (B6) according to any one of the games table,
The movable means is means that can move to the second position even when the dish full tank error display is displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 28 (f) and 17 (c)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B8)
(B3) to (B7) according to any one of the games table,
The movable means is means capable of moving to the second position even when the dish full tank error display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(B9)
(B3) to (B8) according to any one of the games table,
Provided with operating means (for example, a chance button 136) provided at a position operable by the player;
A game stand characterized by that.
(B10)
(B9) is a game machine,
The movable means is configured to move from the first position to the second position in response to the operation means being operated.
A game stand characterized by that.
(B11)
(B3) to (B10) according to any one of the games table,
The movable means moves from the first position through the second position to a third position (for example, the movement completion position of the effect movable body 806 shown in FIG. 29A, and the shielding means shown in FIG. 17H). Is a means that can be moved to
A game stand characterized by that.
(B12)
(B11) is a gaming table,
The third position (for example, the movement completion position of the effect movable body 806 shown in FIG. 29A) is a position in front of the display means,
The movable means located at the third position (for example, a position that overlaps the entirety of the characters “please remove the ball” (see FIG. 29A)) does not overlap the dish full tank error display;
A game stand characterized by that.
(B13)
(B11) is a gaming table,
The third position (for example, the position of the shielding means shown in FIG. 17 (h)) is a position in front of the display means,
The movable means located at the third position does not overlap with the dish full tank error display (for example, see FIG. 17 (h)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B14)
(B1) to (B13) according to any one of the games table,
The movable means is means provided to be movable in front of the display means (see, for example, FIGS. 28 to 30 and FIGS. 17 to 19).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B15)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B14),
The dish full tank error display is one of a plurality of types of errors (for example, front frame door open error, bottom dish full tank error, radio wave sensor error, magnetic sensor error, ball shortage error) (for example, bottom dish full tank error). ) Is a display corresponding to
A game stand characterized by that.
(B16)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B15),
One display of the plurality of types of display is an effect display (for example, display of a hold icon, display of a background image, display of an aura image, display of a decorative pattern, display of a character image),
A game stand characterized by that.
(B17)
(B16) is a gaming table,
The effect display is a display of a hold icon,
A game stand characterized by that.
(B18)
(B16) is a gaming table,
The effect display is a background display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(B19)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B18),
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(B20)
The gaming machine according to any one of (B1) to (B18),
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).
A game stand characterized by that.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with production means (for example, production movable body 806). The production means is at least movable (for example, moved, rotated, vibrated). The production means may be one that performs one or more of movement, rotation, and vibration, or may be capable of performing all of movement, rotation, and vibration. Further, the effect means may be provided with second display means (for example, sub display device 808, light guide plate 812 (PM plate)).

  The first display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) does not move. The first display means is fixed.

At least a part of the display area of the second display means is at least transmissive. A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be used as the second display means. The transmissive liquid crystal display device can switch between transmission and non-transmission of the display area. In a state where the display area of the transmissive liquid crystal display device is transmitting, the player can visually recognize the back surface (rear side) of the display area.
At least a part of the second display means is at least transparent. For the second display means, a transparent plate or a glass plate formed of a transparent resin (for example, acrylic) may be used. A lens cut of a predetermined pattern is formed on the plate surface of the transparent plate or the glass plate, and when the LED lamp emits light arranged in the vicinity, the transparent plate or the glass plate has a predetermined pattern based on the lens cut pattern. Lights on the pattern.

Note that the transmittance of at least a part of the second display means may not be 0%.
The entire second display means may be transparent.
Note that the transmittance of at least part of the second display means may be 100%.
Note that at least a part of the first display unit may be at least visible through at least a part of the second display unit.
It should be noted that at least a part of the game area may be at least visible through at least a part of the second display means.
Note that the transmittance of at least part of the second display means is a first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%.
Note that the transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the second display means may be changed stepwise. This gradual change means that the transmittance changes in order of the first value, the second value, and the third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value are respectively It may be a different value.
Note that the transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the second display means may be changed only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.
Note that the transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state after the second display means is changed from the low state to the high state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance.
The second display means may be a movable (movable, rotatable, vibrable) liquid crystal display device.
The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include third display means, and at least one of the second display means and the third display means may be transmissive.
Note that both the second display means and the third display means may be at least transmissive.
Only one of the second display means and the third display means may be at least transmissive.
The third display unit may be the same as the second display unit.
Note that the third display means may be installed in a rendering means that is movable (movable, rotatable, vibrated).
The third display unit may execute an effect that can be executed by the second display unit.
The technical matter applied to the second display means can also be applied to the third display means.
Note that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with further display means (for example, display means constituted by a liquid crystal display device or a light guide plate).

Note that the transmittance of part or all of the second display may not be 100%.
Note that the transmittance of a part or all of the second display may not be 0% (the second display may be transmitted).
Note that the transmittance of part or all of the second display may be 0%. (The second display may not be transparent).
Note that the entire second display may be transparent.
Only part of the second display may have a transmittance of 100%.
Note that part or all of the first display may be visible through a part of the second display.
A part of one or a plurality of displays including the first display may be visible through a part of the second display.
Note that one or a plurality of displays including the first display may be visible through part of the second display.
A part of one or more displays other than the first display may be visible through a part of the second display.
Note that one or more displays other than the first display may be visible through a part of the second display.
Note that the transmittance of a part or all of the second display is a first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%.
Note that the transmittance of a part or the whole of the second display may change stepwise. This gradual change means that the transmittance changes in order of the first value, the second value, and the third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value are respectively It may be a different value.
Note that the transmittance of a part or the whole of the second display may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.
Note that the transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state after the second display has the low transmittance from the low state to the high state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance.
Thereby, the second display can be easily seen, and it may be difficult for the player to miss the second display.

Note that the transmittance of part or all of the first display may not be 100%.
Note that the transmittance of part or all of the first display may not be 0% (the second display may be transparent).
Note that part or all of the transmittance of the first display may be 0%. (The second display may not be transparent).
Only part of the first display may have a transmittance of 100%.
Note that part or all of the second display may be visible through a part of the first display.
A part of one or a plurality of displays other than the second display may be visible through a part of the first display.
Note that one or a plurality of displays other than the second display may be visible through a part of the first display.
Note that the transmittance of part or all of the first display is the first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%.
Note that the transmittance of a part or the whole of the first display may change stepwise. This gradual change means that the transmittance changes in order of the first value, the second value, and the third value, and the first value, the second value, and the third value are respectively It may be a different value.
Note that the transmittance of a part or the whole of the first display may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.
Note that the transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state after changing from the low state of the first display to the high state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance.

The phrase “at least a part of the first display has at least low visibility” may indicate that at least a part of the first display is at least difficult to see from the player.
The phrase “at least a part of the first display has at least low visibility” may indicate that at least a part of the first display is at least invisible from the player.

The first area may be an area including at least a part of the first display area.
The second area may be an area including at least a part of the second display area.
The first area may be an area including at least a part of the second display area.
The second area may be an area including at least a part of the first display area.
The first area may not include the first display area. Here, the first region corresponds to a part of a so-called center accessory.
The second area may not include the second display area. Here, the second region corresponds to a decorative portion of the sub display device 808 and the like.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with error notification means capable of at least reporting an error.
The error notification means includes a decorative lamp (notification by light emission), a speaker (notification by sound), a light guide plate (transparent plate) (characters and patterns appear by light emission), a liquid crystal (display by image and characters), and the like.

There is a first error in which an error is displayed on a display means such as a first display means or a second display means.
There is a second error that does not display an error on the display means.
The error display is the first error.
The first error may be an error that is not easily noticed by the player if no error is displayed (no error notification is given). For example, the first error is a door opening error, a lower pan full error, or the like.
The first error may be an error for warning the player of fraud. The pachinko machine 100 performs error notification to warn the player of fraud when a predetermined sensor detects an external radio wave, magnetism, vibration or the like.
The first error may be an error for notifying an amusement shop clerk of an abnormality of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 performs error notification for notifying the abnormality of the pachinko machine 100 when a predetermined sensor detects radio waves, magnetism, vibration, and the like from the outside.
Note that the second error may be an error that is less likely to be resolved immediately. This second error is, for example, a door opening error or a lower pan full error.
The second error is an error that is easily noticed by a player without displaying an error (for example, a game ball cannot be fired, an image is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, a prize ball is not paid out, or an effect movable body 224. Etc.) may be an error).

Errors that may occur in the pachinko machine 100 include, for example, an error related to an abnormality in the number of game balls to be paid out, a lower pan full tank error (ball removal notification) that is notified when the lower pan is full, an open condition for an attacker or electric chew An abnormal winning error that is notified when a winning of a game ball to an attacker or electric chew is detected when is not established. When fraud is detected by a sensor (for example, magnetism or radio wave), a fraud error is reported as a fraudulent act (radio wave sensor error, magnetic sensor error, etc.), or vibration is applied to the pachinko machine 100 from outside Vibration detection error (vibration detection error may be left on the display means such as the decorative symbol display device 208 only when the variable winning opening 234 can be opened, such as during a big hit game, (A game state may also be left on the display means), a gaming machine failure error for notifying a failure of the pachinko machine 100, a door opening error, a payout means error relating to an abnormality of the payout means, an error relating to a poor connection of the board, and a production movable body 224 There are errors related to abnormal stop positions.
Any of the above errors may be the first error. Any of the above errors may be a second error.
The above error may be left on the display means such as the decorative symbol display device 208 only when the variable winning opening 234 can be opened, such as during a big hit game, or left on the display means in any game state. May be.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a storage tray (for example, the lower tray 128) that can store at least a game ball. When the operation means is operated, at least the game balls stored in the storage tray are It can be discharged.
The first display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray.
According to this configuration, at least a part of the notification that prompts the player to discharge the game ball from the storage tray is hidden by the effect display, thereby reducing the visibility of the notification, thereby concentrating the player on the effect display. You may be able to entertain.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes first operating means (for example, a ball discharge lever 132).
The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes second operation means (for example, a chance button 136).
The operation means may be at least one of the first operation means and the second operation means.
Note that the operation means may be a chance button.
Note that the operation means may be a return button (for example, the return operation button 142).
The operation means may be a lending button (for example, a ball lending operation button 140).

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include a plurality of movable display devices that are movable (for example, movable, rotatable, and capable of vibrating). For example, a liquid crystal display device is used as the movable display device.
The visibility of a part of the first display may be lowered when one of the plurality of movable display devices moves.
When one of the plurality of movable display devices moves, the overall visibility of the first display may be lowered.
The visibility of a part or the whole of the first display may be lowered by moving the plurality of movable display devices.
By moving only one of the plurality of movable display devices, the visibility of a part or the whole of the first display may be lowered.
One of the plurality of effect movable bodies may be a movable display device.

At least a part of the display area of the movable display device is at least transmissive. A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be used as the movable display device. The transmissive liquid crystal display device can switch between transmission and non-transmission of the display area. In a state where the display area of the transmissive liquid crystal display device is transmitting, the player can visually recognize the back surface (rear side) of the display area.
Further, at least a part of the movable display device is at least transparent. For the movable display device, a transparent plate or a glass plate formed of a transparent resin (for example, acrylic) may be used. A lens cut of a predetermined pattern is formed on the plate surface of the transparent plate or the glass plate, and when the LED lamp emits light arranged in the vicinity, the transparent plate or the glass plate has a predetermined pattern based on the lens cut pattern. Lights on the pattern.

Note that the transmittance of at least a part of the movable display device may not be 0%.
Note that the entire movable display device may be transparent.
Note that the transmittance of at least a part of the movable display device may be 100%.
Note that at least a part of the first display means may be at least visible through at least a part of the movable display device.
Note that at least a part of the game area may be at least visible through at least a part of the movable display device.
Note that the transmittance of at least a part of the movable display device is a first value, and the first value may be greater than 0% and less than 100%.
Note that the transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the movable display device may be changed in a stepwise manner. This stepwise change means that the transmittance is a first value, a second value, and a third value. The first value, the second value, and the third value may be different from each other.
Note that the transmittance of at least a part or the whole of the movable display device may change only from one of the two values of the highest value and the lowest value to the other.
Note that the transmittance of the movable display device may be changed from a low state to a high state, and then the transmittance may be changed from the high state to the low state. Here, the transmittance changed from the high state to the low state may be the same transmittance as the low state before the change of the transmittance, or may be a different transmittance.

  When the first display and the second display are respectively displayed, the visibility of the first display may be relatively high and the visibility of the second display may be relatively low. .

  The display related to the game includes, for example, error display, operation request notification, alert display, presentation display, notice display, user mode display (menu display, mission display, volume / brightness adjustment display), demonstration display, power-on display (power supply display) Or during power recovery).

  An operation means (launch strength changing operation means) capable of changing at least the launch intensity of the game ball during the 134 operation of the ball launch handle by the player may be provided. The launch intensity of the game ball may be changed so as to increase only when the launch intensity changing operation means is operated. The launch intensity of the game ball may be changed to become stronger based on the operation of the launch intensity changing operation unit once. In this case, when the firing strength changing operation means is further operated once, the launching strength of the game ball may be restored.

As an example of the first display, a display capable of notifying that the firing intensity changing operation means is operated, a display prompting the operation of the firing intensity changing operation means, and prompting the release of the operation of the firing intensity changing operation means (for example, pressing Display that prompts you to release your hand from the launch intensity changing operation means, and a display that reminds you of the operation of the launch intensity changing operation means (for example, an image that reminds you of the launch intensity changing operation means in the roulette effect of the electric tulong opening effect (for example, In the case of playing a big hit game by right-handed, the notice display of the big hit decision of the special figure variable game being executed is stopped).
The display relating to the firing strength changing operation means may have different display modes according to a plurality of gaming states (for example, during electric support and during non-electric support). In this case, for example, at least a part of the display relating to the firing intensity changing operation means in the display mode of one gaming state (during electric support) may be hidden by the second display, and the other gaming state (non-electrical state) The display relating to the firing intensity changing operation means in the display mode of “supporting” may not be hidden by the second display. Further, for example, at least a part of the display regarding the firing intensity changing operation means in the display mode of one game state (during electric support) may not be hidden by the second display, and the other game state (non-display) The display relating to the firing intensity changing operation means in the display mode of “electric support” may be hidden by the second display.
The display related to the firing intensity changing operation means may be a display mode different from a right-handed notification (for example, a right-handed notification effect 724 described later), may be a display mode included in the right-handed notification, The display mode may be the same as that for the hit notification.
In addition, the display regarding a right-handed alert | report and a firing intensity change operation means may partially overlap the displayed period. For example, the period of notification that “Please return the handle to the left” at the end of the electric support is the period from the end of the electric support to the end of the 4th special figure variation game. For example, the period in which “Please let go” is informed from the end of the electric support to the end of the first special figure variation game.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a game machine according to a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. About the structure of the pachinko machine 100 by this Embodiment, since it is the same as that of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted. Hereinafter, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

First, the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3-1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 35A and FIG. 35B show display examples on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the special figure variable game. As shown in FIG. 35A, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the upper left of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In FIG. 35, the variation of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is indicated by a downward thick arrow. On the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, there are provided a fourth symbol display area 208e capable of displaying the fourth symbol, and a special figure hold number display area 208f for displaying the number of special figure variable games held in numbers. Yes. In the fourth symbol display area 208e, a black circle indicating that the special figure is changing is displayed. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “3” indicating that the special figure 1 variable game has three hold numbers is displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 35 (a), a lower pan full tank error display 704 is displayed, and it is notified that a lower pan full tank error has occurred. Further, in this example, the game ball in the ball tank 150 is lost or the ball shortage error occurs when the number of game balls in the ball tank 150 becomes less than the predetermined number, together with the lower plate full tank error. This ball shortage error may occur, for example, when a game ball is clogged in an island facility where the pachinko machine 100 is installed. Further, the lower plate full tank error can be canceled by the player operating the ball discharge lever 132, but the ball shortage error is an error that can be canceled only by a game store clerk in a game store. For this reason, a ball shortage error display 706 including a character string “Please call a clerk shortage clerk” is displayed in the approximate center of the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a ball shortage error has occurred. In addition, the player is informed that an operation by the store clerk of the game store is necessary to cancel the ball shortage error.

  Further, at the time shown in FIG. 35A, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is reached, and an image representing the chance button 136 and a downward arrow pointing to the image are displayed below the ball shortage error display 706. Including a chance button operation request display 707 prompts the player to operate the chance button 136. Also, below the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, a tutorial display 708 including a character image of a girl (princess Chibi) and a speech balloon image of a girl “A reach is expected to develop” is displayed. Has been. In the tutorial display, explanations of effects executed during the game are given. The tutorial display 708 in this example suggests that if a reach is executed among a plurality of reach effects provided in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example, the reach effect may be developed later. .

  FIG. 35 (b) shows a state after the chance button 136 is operated (pressed once) by the player from the state shown in FIG. 35 (a). Based on the operation of the chance button 136, a tutorial display 709 including a character image of a spear and a speech balloon image of a spear “The appearance of a spear is a chance up” is displayed. This suggests that an effect with a relatively high jackpot reliability is executed in the special figure variation game being executed. Further, the tutorial display 709 is displayed on a layer in front of the lower dish full error display 704. The tutorial display 709 is displayed so as to overlap with at least a part of the lower pan full error display 704. For this reason, at least a part of the lower plate full tank error display 704 is hidden by the tutorial display 709, and the visibility of the lower plate full tank error display 704 is lowered. On the other hand, the tutorial display 709 is displayed so as not to overlap with the insufficient sphere error display 706. For this reason, even when the tutorial display 709 is displayed, the visibility of the sphere shortage error display 706 does not deteriorate. The tutorial display 709 is displayed so as not to overlap the fourth symbol display area 208e and the special figure hold number display area 208f. For this reason, even when the tutorial display 709 is displayed, the visibility of the fourth symbol and the special figure reservation number display does not decrease.

  Next, the effects shown in FIGS. 35C to 35E will be described. FIG. 35 (c) shows a display example on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the special figure variable game. As shown in FIG. 35 (c), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the upper left of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the fourth symbol display area 208e, a black circle indicating that the special figure is changing is displayed. In the special figure hold number display area 208f, a number “3” indicating that the special figure 1 variable game has three hold numbers is displayed.

  Further, since a lower plate full tank error has occurred, a lower plate full tank error display 704 is displayed on the left side of the effect display area 208d. In FIG. 35 (e), the background displayed in the back layer of the lower pan full tank error display 704 is white. For this reason, the visibility of the character string “please remove the sphere” displayed in black in the lower plate full tank error display 704 is relatively high.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 35 (d), during the execution of the special figure variation game, an effect is started in which Tonosama and Panda confront each other in space. In the effect display area 208d, an image of Tono-sama holding a sword, an image of a panda wearing boxing gloves, and a background image of the universe as a confrontation place are displayed. The lower plate full tank error display 704 is displayed, for example, on a layer in front of the Tono-sama image. Also, the lower space full error display 704 and the outer space portion of the background image displayed on the back layer of the Tono-sama image are displayed in gray close to black. For this reason, the visibility of the character string “please remove the sphere” displayed in black in the lower plate full tank error display 704 is relatively lowered. In addition, the visibility of the decorative symbol and the special figure reservation number display is similarly lowered. On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 35 (d) is started, the outline portion of the fourth symbol displayed in black circles in FIG. 35 (c) is displayed in white. For this reason, even if the effect shown in FIG. 35 (d) is started, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the fourth symbol and to make it easier to understand that the special figure variable game is being executed. Note that the outline of the fourth symbol may always be displayed in white. That is, the fourth symbol may be easily visible in any state.

  Also, FIG. 35 (e) shows that after the player notices the lower plate full tank error display 704 shown in FIG. 35 (c) and operates the ball discharge lever to release the lower plate full tank error, This shows a state in which an effect of confronting is started. Since the lower plate full tank error is cancelled, the lower plate full tank error display 704 is erased. Further, comparing FIG. 35D and FIG. 35E, the visibility of the Tono-sama image is higher in FIG. 35E. Thus, the visibility of the effect display (for example, a character image of Tono-sama, etc.) can be made higher when an error (for example, lower pan full error) has not occurred than when the error has occurred.

  Next, the effects shown in FIGS. 35 (f) and 35 (g) will be described. As shown in FIG. 35 (f), in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A black circle is displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e located in the upper right of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and “3” is displayed in the special figure reservation number display area 208f. Below the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variation icon display area 700 capable of displaying a variation icon corresponding to the special figure variation game, and a left side of the variation icon display area 700 are displayed. Special figure 1 hold icon display area 701 capable of displaying the same number of hold icons (for example, circular images) and variable icon display area 700 are located to the right of the number of holds, and the same number as that of special figure 2 variable games. And a special figure 2 hold icon display area 702 capable of displaying the hold icon. In this example, the fluctuation icon is not displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 700, three hold icons are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 701, and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 702 is displayed. The hold icon is not displayed. In this example, while the number of holds is displayed in the special figure hold number display area 208f, the number of hold is also displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 701.

  Further, a tutorial display 708 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The tutorial display 708 is displayed in a layer in front of the decorative design. For this reason, at least a part of the decorative design is hidden in the tutorial display 708 and the visibility is lowered.

  FIG. 35 (g) shows a state in which the shielding means 816 is moving upward in a plane substantially parallel to the screen in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 during execution of the special figure variation game. . In the drawing, an upward arrow shown at the lower left of the shielding unit 816 indicates the moving direction of the shielding unit 816. The shielding unit 816 can shield the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 by moving to the front of the decorative symbol display device 208. As the shielding unit 816, for example, the above-described effect movable bodies 800, 802, 804, 806, and the like can be given.

  In this example, when the shielding means 816 and the lower end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 overlap, the variable icon display area 700, the special figure 1 hold icon display area 701, and the special figure 2 hold icon display area 702 disappear. , All pending icons are erased. The tutorial display 708 is also deleted. In addition, when the variation icon is displayed, the variation icon may be deleted. In addition, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c located at the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 move, for example, to the upper left of the screen. Thereby, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c do not overlap with the shielding means 816 and are not shielded. In this way, the decorative design is not hidden during the performance with the movement of the shielding means 816.

  It should be noted that a hold icon or a variation icon may be displayed at the time of performing an effect accompanied by the movement of the shielding means 816. Further, during the movement of the shielding means 816, an effect image or the like may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, at least a part of the effect image may be hidden by the shielding unit 816. Further, at the time of performing an effect accompanied by the movement of the shielding means 816, the special figure holding number display area 208f may disappear and the special figure holding number may be deleted, or the decorative symbol display device 208 displays only the fourth symbol. May be.

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a decorative symbol display device 208 as display means.
The decorative symbol display device 208 can at least display, for example, a lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 as the first display.
The decorative symbol display device 208 can display at least a tutorial display 709 as a second display.
The decorative symbol display device 208 can display at least a sphere shortage error display 706 as a third display.
At least a part of the lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 has at least low visibility when the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the first state.
The first state is a state in which at least the tutorial display 709 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.
The ball shortage error display 706 is displayed at least at a position where visibility is at least higher than the lower pan full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 when the decorative symbol display device 208 is in the first state. ,
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, since the visibility of the lower tray full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704 may be lowered, the decorative symbol display device tries to recognize the notification content of the lower plate full tank error display (ball removal notification) 704. In some cases, the player can be focused on 208 so that the player can concentrate on the game. In addition, since the visibility of the lower pan full error display (ball removal notification) 704 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be lowered, the player's line of sight may be directed to the tutorial display 709. is there. In addition, since the ball shortage error display 706 is easy to check even in the first state, it may be easy for the player to check the ball shortage error display 706 while viewing the tutorial display 709.

  Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to Example 3-2 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a decorative symbol display device 208 capable of executing a plurality of notification effects such as an alerting notification effect, an electric-chu long opening effect (details will be described later), or a prefetch notification effect. . FIG. 36 is a table for explaining an alert notification (first display) that can be displayed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The alerting notice is a notice that alerts the player about matters that are not directly related to the profit of the game. The game profit includes a prize ball awarded as a profit to the player and information related thereto. Since the contents of the alert notification do not directly affect the profit of the game, there is no effect on the profit of the game even if the player ignores the alert alert or does not follow the alert alert. However, the alert notification includes, for example, physical, mental, or monetary matters that may affect the player's profit other than the game profit.
Note that what is given to the player as a profit is not limited to the above-mentioned prize ball (so-called pachinko ball), and may be a medal, for example. Also, it is not always necessary to give a player a real ball, medal, etc., for example, first, a profit is electronically given to the player, and the player uses the electronic profit for a game, It may be converted into a prize ball. Of course, the player may not be provided with the real thing, and the player may be able to exchange electronic profits for prizes.
Further, the profit related to the game may be defined as that the profit can be used to play the game again on the game machine. In other words, the profit not related to the game may be defined as that the profit cannot be used again on the game stand using the profit.

  The table shown in FIG. 36 exemplifies nine warning alerts (notices that are not at least related to the profit of the game). In FIG. 36, the notification content and the notification timing are shown together with the name of each alerting notification.

  The alert notification with the name “age restriction” has the notification content “games under 18 years of age and admission to the playground are regulated by law”, and the notification timing is “during demonstration”. . That is, the notification timing is based on the premise that the special figure variable game is inactive and the attacker is inactive. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the "age restriction" alert notification is not followed, there is a financial disadvantage that even if the game profit is obtained, the exchange to the prize is not permitted.

  The alert notification with the name “Capture Method” has the notification content “Beware of Vicious Strategy Sales” and the notification timing is “Demo”. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the alerting notification of the “strategy method” is not followed, there is a financial disadvantage that may pay money for useless information.

  The alert notification with the name “game time” is the notification content “If you play for a long time, please put a break moderately.”, The notification timing is “During Demonstration / 2 hours after game start It is. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the alert notification of “game time” is not followed, there are physical disadvantages such as a decrease in the player's physical function and fatigue due to a long game.

  The alert notification with the name “Direction” is the notification content “Please do not look directly at the light source for a long time. Be careful not to pinch your fingers etc. in the stage device. Please enjoy the game with appropriate volume and light intensity. The notification timing is “during demo / volume and light amount adjustment”. Disadvantages for players who fail to follow the cautionary alerts for `` directing '' include physical disadvantages such as decreased hearing due to high volume games and light-sensitive seizures caused by lighting or blinking of high-intensity lamps. is there.

  The alert notification with the name “Secondary use restriction” is the notification content is “Prohibit uploading of photos, videos, etc. to the Internet on this game machine”, and the notification timing is “During Demonstration / At the time of production execution” It is. Disadvantages of players who fail to comply with the “secondary use restriction” alerts include monetary and social status disadvantages such as fines and imprisonment for violation of laws and regulations.

  The alert notification with the name “investment deterrence” is “Notice of excessive investment. Pachinko / pachislot is a fun game to enjoy moderately”. The predetermined rotation speed has elapsed. A player's disadvantage caused by not following the “investment deterrence” alert notification is a financial disadvantage due to investment failure.

The alert notification with the name “prevention of forgetting to pick up” is the notification content “Please be careful about forgetting to take a prepaid card or theft”. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the alert notification of “prevention of forgetting” is not followed, there is a financial disadvantage due to the loss of the balance in the prepaid card that has been forgotten.
In addition, you may perform the alerting alerting | reporting of the said "forgetting prevention" at timings other than the above-mentioned timing. For example, at the end of a big hit (so-called “first hit”) that occurred in the normal gaming state, a “not forgetting” warning alert is notified, and at the end of the big hit in the villa that occurred with the big hit, It is not necessary to notify the alert notification. In addition, even if a big hit occurs, if the jackpot is less profitable than other jackpots, or if the jackpot is not profitable, a “forget-to-forget” warning alert is reported. It does not have to be done. In the first place, if a player forgets to take a prepaid card, there is a prepaid card in which the player's consciousness is added to the profit when the profit is given with the remaining balance on the prepaid card. It is desirable that the “forget-to-forget” warning is issued immediately after the player has been given a profit, and the player forgets the presence of the prepaid card. It is desirable to be notified after the benefits are granted. Furthermore, the trigger for the “forget-to-forget” warning alert is most effective when the player quits the game. It is desirable that the “forget-to-forget” attention alert notification is notified at a timing when a state advantageous to the player ends such as at the end of ST in FIG.

  In addition, a warning notification of “forgetting to miss” may be notified at the end of the big hit game based on the first big hit after entering the special figure high probability state (probability change). In addition, "prevent forgetting" at the end of the big hit game based on the big hit (15R big hit, sudden short hit big hit, sudden normal big hit) that the subsequent gaming state shifts to the special figure low probability state in the special figure high probability state (probability change) You may alert | report alerting alerting | reporting. In addition, at the end of the big hit game based on winning the big hit (15R big hit, sudden short hit big hit, sudden normal big hit) that the game state in the special figure low probability state is maintained in the special figure low probability state. It is not necessary to notify the “prevention” warning alert. In addition, at the end of the big hit game based on winning the big hit (15R big hit, sudden short hit big hit, sudden normal big hit) that the game state in the special figure low probability state is maintained in the special figure low probability state. It is not necessary to notify the “prevention” warning alert.

  The alert alert with the name “Prevention of damage” is the notification content “Don't operate the operation means with a strong force because there is a risk of damage.” The notification timing is “During demonstration / during performance” is there. As a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the warning notification of “breakage prevention” is not followed, there is a physical disadvantage of being injured due to damage to the operation means.

  The alert notification whose name is “Prevent forgetting to take” is “The user mode is being set. Be careful not to forget to take a 2D barcode at the end of the game.” “User mode is being set (always)”. There is a gaming disadvantage that the contents of the set user mode are lost as a disadvantage of the player that occurs when the alert notification of “Preventing forgetting to take” is not followed. However, it is not a game penalty related to money.

Note that the notification timing of the above alerting notification does not necessarily have to be executed at the above timing. Moreover, it may be performed at timings other than the notification timing described above. In addition, the above alerting notification is merely an example, and other alerting notifications other than those described above may be executed.
In addition, the alerting notification (notification that is not at least related to the profit of the game) is not limited to the exemplified one, and if the player does not follow the notified content, the player has a disadvantage that is different from the game profit. It only has to be generated.

  FIG. 37 shows various states in the state where the special figure variable game is being executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the state where the big hit game is executed, or the state where the special figure variable game and the big hit game are not executed. A display example of a notification effect is shown. Each of FIGS. 37 (a) to (l), and FIGS. 38 to 41, the game board 200 shown in FIG. 3, the decorative symbol display device 208, the universal map display device 210, A display device 212, a special figure 2 display device 214, an ordinary figure hold lamp 216, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, and a variable winning opening 234 (hereinafter referred to as "large board behavior attacker 234") Are extracted). For ease of explanation, each component is shown differently from the arrangement shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to.

  The normal figure starting port 228, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the variable prize opening 234 are arranged on the right path. For this reason, the ease of entering the normal symbol start port 228, special figure 1 start port 230, special figure 2 start port 232 (open state), variable winning port 234 (open state), etc., falls down the right path. The game ball that is to be played differs from the game ball that is to be dropped on the left path.

  About each of the normal figure starting port 228, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the variable prize opening 234, these general figure starting port 228, the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the variable prize opening 234 are arrange | positioned on the right path | route. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, the special FIG. 1 starting port 230 is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling down the left path due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like. It is relatively difficult to enter a falling game ball. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used. Moreover, you may further provide a usual figure start port in the left side path | route. In addition, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is arranged at the lower center of the game board, and it is easy to enter the special figure 2 starting port 230 with a game ball falling on the right path and a game ball falling on the left path. May be the same.

  In the state shown in FIG. 37 (a), all the usual figure hold lamps 216 are turned off, and it is notified that there is no usual figure hold. Further, the general map B is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210, and it is informed that the general map variable game is off. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is all turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 1 hold. In addition, the special figure I is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and it is notified that the previous special figure 1 variable game is out of play. In the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, one LED on the left side is lit and the other three are turned off, and it is informed that there is one holding in the special figure 2. Further, special figure A is stopped and displayed on special figure 2 display device 214, and it is notified that this special figure 2 variable game is a 15R special big hit.

  In the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in any of the symbol display regions 208a to 208c, and the result of this special figure 2 variable game is a 15R special big hit. Is informed. A change icon display area 711 is arranged on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a change icon of a pattern in which characters of “eight”, “yo”, “general”, and “army” are evenly arranged in a circular pattern is displayed. Has been. On the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 711, a special figure holding display area 713 for displaying the holding of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is arranged, and “8”, “dai”, “general”, “military” are displayed in a circular pattern. One hold icon 713a having the same pattern as the variation icon, in which characters are evenly arranged, is displayed, and it is notified that there is one hold in FIG. Further, the open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 37 (b) following FIG. 37 (a), the big hit game start effect is executed. In the big hit game start effect, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c disappear from the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the decorative symbols are not stopped, and the variable icon display area 711 and the special figure hold display area 713 are also displayed. It disappears and no change icon or hold icon is displayed. Instead, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes an effect display area 208d, and a jackpot game start effect 715 is displayed with a character string of “big board big hit”. Further, the open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state.

  In the state shown in FIG. 37C following FIG. 37B, the first round (1R) of 15R big hit game is executed. In the effect display area 208d that extends over the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit game effect 716 is executed in a wide area in the center. The upper left of the effect display area 208d is a round number display area 717 for displaying the number of rounds in which the big hit game is being executed. Here, “1R” is displayed and the big hit game in the first round is being executed. Is informed. The top right of the effect display area 208d is a big hit type display area 718 for displaying the big hit type. Here, “decoration 7” is displayed to notify that the big hit is a 15R special big hit. Further, the door member of the large board behavior attacker 234 opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds).

  In the state shown in FIG. 37D following FIG. 37C, the 15th round (15R) of 15R big hit game is executed. In the effect display area 208d that extends over the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the big hit game effect 716 is executed in a wide area in the center. In the round number display area 717, “15R” is displayed to notify that the big hit game of the 15th round is being executed. In the jackpot type display area 718, “decoration 7” is displayed to notify that the jackpot is a 15R special jackpot. Further, the door member of the large board behavior attacker 234 opens and closes at predetermined time intervals (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds). In addition, two usual figure hold lamps 216 are lit, and it is notified that two usual figure holds are increased during the big hit game. Also, the general map display device 210 executes a general map variable game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 37 (e) following FIG. 37 (d), the big hit game end effect is executed. In the big hit game end effect, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes the effect display area 208d, and the probability change notification effect 720 by the character image including the character string of “probability change entry!” Is displayed. The probability change notification effect 720 notifies that the game state after the big hit game is in a probability change state. The open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state. In addition, two common-use hold lamps 216 are lit, and it is notified that there are two common-use hold lamps. In addition, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 37 (f) following FIG. 37 (e), the big hit game end effect is continuously executed. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the probability change notification effect 720 is ended, and the attention alert notification effect 722 for performing the alert notification of “preventing forgetting to take” is started. In the alert notification effect 722, an animation in which the IC card emerges along the arrow from the IC card insertion slot is displayed at the center of the effect display area 208d. From the upper right end of the effect display area 208d, “Forget IC card” is displayed. An animation in which the character string “N” appears in sequence toward the left is displayed, and an animation in which the character string “Please note” appears in reverse order from the lower left end of the effect display area 208d is displayed. Further, the open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state. In addition, two common-use hold lamps 216 are lit, and it is notified that there are two common-use hold lamps. Further, the general map B is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210, and it is informed that the general map variable game is off.

  In the state shown in FIG. 37 (g) following FIG. 37 (f), the big hit game end effect is continuously executed. The alerting notification effect 722 for alerting “forgetting prevention” is continuously executed. The open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state. In addition, one ordinary hold lamp 216 is lit to notify that there is one ordinary hold. Moreover, the general map display device 210 has started a general map variable game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 37 (h) following FIG. 37 (g), the big hit game end effect is continuously executed. The alerting notification effect 722 is continuously executed. The open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state. In addition, one ordinary hold lamp 216 is lit to notify that there is one ordinary hold. Further, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 37 (i) following FIG. 37 (h), the “notice to forget” alerting notification effect 722 has ended, and the special figure 2 variable game in FIG. 37 (a) has ended. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is displayed again, and the state immediately before the start of the next special figure 2 variable game is displayed. In addition, one ordinary hold lamp 216 is lit to notify that there is one ordinary hold. Further, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  The state shown in FIG. 37 (j) following FIG. 37 (i) shows a state immediately after the special figure 2 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 37 (j), the leftmost LED lamp of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is extinguished, and the special figure 2 display device 214 starts the variable display of special figure 2. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the special figure hold display area 713, display of a hold reduction animation for reducing the number of hold icons 713a by 1 is started. In this example, the hold decrease animation moves the hold icon 713a in the special figure hold display area 713 to the left as a whole and moves it to the variable icon display area 711. The special figure 2 hold lamp 220 notifies that the hold in the special figure 2 has decreased from 1 to 0 by turning off the leftmost LED lamp.

  In addition, since the most recent big hit was a special figure A big hit, after the big hit game is over, the gaming state shifts to the electric support state (ordinary high probability state). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the general-purpose starting port 228 and the special-purpose starting port 232 are arranged on the right path. For this reason, when the gaming state is the electric support state, the player hits the game ball with a right hand and plays a game. For this reason, a right-handed notification effect 724 is started at the upper and lower stages of the effect display area 208d in order to notify the player that the player should make a right-hand shot. In the right-handed notification effect 724, an animation is displayed in which a white character string “⇒Right-handed⇒⇒” moves in the reverse order toward the right from the upper left end of the effect display area 208d to a black belt-like telop. From the lower right end of the area 208d, an animation is displayed in which a black character string “⇒Right type⇒⇒” sequentially moves toward the left on a black belt-like telop. In addition, one ordinary hold lamp 216 is lit to notify that there is one ordinary hold. Further, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 37 (k) subsequent to FIG. 37 (j), the start state of the special figure 2 variable game is continuously shown, and the hold reduction animation is being executed. The hold icon 713a shows a state in which the hold icon 713a has moved further in the direction of the variable icon display area 711 than the state shown in FIG. The right-handed notification effect 724 is continuously executed. In addition, one ordinary hold lamp 216 is lit to notify that there is one ordinary hold. Further, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  In the state shown in FIG. 37 (l) following FIG. 37 (k), the state in which the special figure 2 variable game is being executed is continuously shown. A variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display region 711 on the lower left side in the effect display region 208d to notify that the special figure variation game is currently being executed. It is informed that there is no hold icon in the special figure hold display area 713 on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area 711 and there is no hold in the special figure 2. Further, the open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state.

  The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is all turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 1 hold. In addition, the special figure I is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and it is notified that the previous special figure 1 variable game is out of play. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. Further, the special figure 2 display device 214 executes the variable game of the special figure 2. In addition, one ordinary hold lamp 216 is lit to notify that there is one ordinary hold. Also, the general map display device 210 executes a general map variable game. In addition, in the upper and lower stages of the effect display area 208d, in order to inform the player that a right stroke should be made, a black belt-like telop is displayed in white letters from the left end to the right end as “right”, “hit”, “ The right-handed notification effect 724 is executed with an animation in which the character strings of “C”, “⇒”, or “⇒⇒” are sequentially moved.

  The states shown in FIGS. 37 (e) to 37 (h) are jackpot end intervals that are periods in which the special figure variable game is stopped and the variable winning opening 234 is not operated. During the jackpot ending interval, the special figure variable game and the variable prize opening 234 are in the game because the normal figure variable game based on the fact that the game ball launched by the player has passed the normal figure start port 228 can be operated. Since the opening / closing operation is inactive, it can be said that it is a period in which the significance of launching a game ball is less than in other periods.

  FIG. 38 shows various states in the state where the special figure variable game is being executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment, the state where the big hit game is executed, or the state where the special figure variable game and the big hit game are not executed. Example 3-2 of the notification effect is shown. Since the states shown in FIGS. 38A to 38E are the same as those in FIGS. 38A to 38E, description thereof will be omitted.

  Moreover, the period of FIG.38 (f) -FIG.38 (i) is the same as FIG.37 (f)-(h). In the state shown in FIG. 38 (f), the big hit game end effect is continuously executed. In the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the probability change notification effect 720 similar to that in FIG. 37 (e) ends, and the same alert notification for alerting “forgetting prevention” as in FIG. 37 (f). Production 722 has started. The open / close state of the large board behavior attacker 234 is a closed state. In addition, two common-use hold lamps 216 are lit, and it is notified that there are two common-use hold lamps. Further, the general map B is stopped and displayed on the general map display device 210, and it is informed that the general map variable game is off.

  FIG. 38 (f) further shows a state in which the effect of prefetching notice notification based on the result of prefetching the suspension of special figure 2 and predetermining the stop symbol in the special figure prefetching process is started. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The pre-determination result (special drawing prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. The special figure prefetching process is executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG.

  The notification conditions for the pre-read notice notification (second display) are during the alert notification effect 722 (first display), and when the special figure fluctuation game is not operating and when the large board behavior attacker 234 is not operating ( Maintenance of the closed state). In the prefetch notice notification effect 730 shown in FIG. 38 (f), an image representing a family crest is displayed in the center of the effect display area 208d so as to hide the alert notification effect 722. However, in FIG. 38 (f), the transmittance of the image of the prefetch notice notification effect 730 is set to be relatively high, and the player can visually recognize the alert notification effect 722 through the image of the prefetch notice notification effect 730.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 38 (g), the transmittance of the image of the prefetch notice notification effect 730 gradually decreases, and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize the alert notification effect 722 through the image of the prefetch notice notification effect 730. Become. By doing so, the player pays attention to the alerting notice effect 722 at first, but gradually pays attention to the prefetch notice notice effect 730.

  Further, in the state shown in FIG. 38 (h), the transmittance of the image of the prefetch notice notification effect 730 is 0%, and the player cannot visually recognize the alert notification effect 722 through the image of the prefetch notice notification effect 730. . In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 38, the alerting notice for preventing the IC card from being forgotten is hidden by the prefetching notice notice executed based on the pending prefetching result in FIG. Note that the pre-reading notice notification need not be a big hit confirmation, and visual recognition of the alerting notice may be hindered by executing a false prefetching notice notice.

  In FIG. 38 (i) following FIG. 38 (h), the prefetch notice notification effect 730 ends, and the “not forgetting” alerting notification effect 722 hidden in the prefetch notice notification effect 730 becomes visible. Shows the state. FIG. 38J following FIG. 38I is the same as the state shown in FIG.

  In the state shown in FIG. 38 (k), special figure A is stopped on special figure 2 display device 214, and it is notified that this special figure 2 variable game is a 15R special big hit. In the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in any of the symbol display regions 208a to 208c, and the result of this special figure 2 variable game is a 15R special big hit. Is informed. Moreover, all the LEDs of the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 are lit, and it is notified that there are four special figure 2 holds. Also, in the special figure hold display area 713, hold icons 713b, 713c, 713d, and 713e of a pattern in which characters of “eight”, “yo”, “general”, and “army” are evenly arranged in a circular pattern are displayed, respectively. Has been. When the special figure variable game is ended and a big hit is made, the change icon and the hold icon may be hidden. Further, only one of the change icon and the hold icon may be hidden when the big hit.

  In this way, by performing the effect of the alerting notification at a predetermined notification timing, while attracting the attention of the player by the alerting notification, by concealing the alerting notification with other alerts in a state of attracting attention, It is possible to make the player pay attention to other notifications. Further, since the alerting notification is not related to the profit of the game (the number of game balls), even if it is hidden by another notification, it does not affect the profit of the game in which the player is most interested in the game.

  FIG. 39 shows various states in a state where a special figure variable game is executed, a big hit game is executed, or a special figure variable game and a big hit game are not executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Example 3-3 of the notification effect is shown. 39 (a) to 39 (k) are the same as FIGS. 38 (a) to 38 (k) except that the effect of the pre-reading notice is different, and thus the description of the same parts is omitted.

  39 (f) to (h), the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 becomes the effect display area 208d, and instead of the pre-reading notice notification effect 730 shown in FIGS. 38 (f) to (h), the effect display area. A state is shown in which a prefetch notice notification effect 740 is displayed in which the entire 208d is displayed in black and a white character string is displayed to notify the prefetch notice. The notification conditions for the pre-read notice notification (second display) are during the alert notification effect 722 (first display), and when the special figure fluctuation game is inactive and the large board behavior attacker 234 is inactive ( Maintenance of the closed state). In the pre-read notice notification effect 730, the effect display area 208d is painted black, so that even if the alert notification effect 722 is executed, the player cannot visually recognize the alert image. It can be said that the pre-reading notice notification effect 740 is performed instead of the alerting notification effect 722. It should be noted that the effect execution times of the alerting notification effect 722 and the prefetch notice notification effect 740 may be the same or different.

  Thus, the other alerting effects (for example, the prefetch notification effect) may be executed, so that the alerting alert effect need not be executed at all. Moreover, you may switch an alerting alerting | reporting effect to another alerting | reporting aspect by performing another effect. For example, the notification mode of the alerting notification that has been performed by the image display and the voice notification may be switched to only the voice notification, or may be changed to a notification mode that is completely different from the notification mode that should have been originally performed. .

  In FIG. 39 (i) following FIG. 39 (h), the prefetch notice notification effect 730 is finished, and the “prevention of forgetting” alerting notification effect 722 hidden in the prefetch notice notification effect 730 becomes visible. The state is shown. In this way, it may be configured such that a part of the execution period of the alerting notification effect 722 is hidden by the pre-reading notice notification effect 730 and the alerting notification effect 722 can be confirmed during the remaining period.

  FIG. 40 shows various states in a state in which a special figure variable game is being executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a state in which a big hit game is being executed, or a state in which neither a special figure variable game nor a big hit game is being executed. Example 3-4 of the notification effect is shown. In the state shown in FIG. 40 (a), the left two of the four LEDs of the general-purpose hold lamp 216 are lit, and it is notified that there are two normal-order holds. In addition, a general map change game is executed on the general map display device 210. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is all turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 1 hold. Further, the special game 1 is executed on the special figure 1 display device 212. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. Further, the special figure J is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and it is notified that the previous special figure 2 variable game is out of play.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208, a variation display of a decorative symbol (indicated by a downward arrow in the drawing) in which “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” sequentially moves from top to bottom is executed. . A variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area 711 to notify that the special figure 1 variation game is currently being executed. In the special figure hold display area 713, no hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that there is no hold in the special figures 1 and 2.

  In the state shown in FIG. 40 (b) following FIG. 40 (a), the left two of the four LEDs of the general-purpose hold lamp 216 are lit, and it is notified that there are two common-use holds. Yes. In addition, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is all turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 1 hold. Further, the special figure I is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and it is notified that the result of the variable game of the special figure 1 is out of date. All the special figure 2 hold lamps 220 are turned off, and it is informed that there is no special figure 2 hold. Further, the special figure J is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 214, and it is notified that the previous special figure 2 variable game is out of play.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the image display area of the decoration symbol display device 208, “decoration 6—decoration 1—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result of this special figure 1 variable game is out of place. Has been. In the variation icon display area 711, no variation icon is displayed, and it is notified that the special figure variation game is inactive. In the special figure hold display area 7, no hold icon is displayed, and it is informed that there is no hold in the special figure 2.

  FIG. 40C shows a state during the demonstration performance period in which a predetermined time has elapsed from the state shown in FIG. The demonstration effect including the alerting notice is executed based on the passage of a predetermined time from the stoppage of the special figure. Further, the demonstration effect including the alerting notification is executed even while the usual figure is changing. During the demonstration effect period, the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is used as the effect display area 208d, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are not displayed, and neither the variable icon display area 711 nor the special figure hold display area 713 is displayed. During the demonstration production period, the character string “menu call by chance button” is displayed together with the image of the chance button 136 in the lower stage of the production display area 208d, and it is notified that various menus can be called by the player pressing the chance button 136. Has been. In FIG. 40 (c), an alerting notification effect 750 for alerting the “age restriction” shown in FIG. 36 is executed. In addition, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  FIG. 40 (d) following FIG. 40 (c) shows a state in which the content of the alerting notification effect 750 is changed from “age restriction” to “strategy method” shown in FIG. 36 during the demonstration performance period. ing. In addition, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game.

  In addition, an electric-chu-long opening effect area is arranged on the lower right side in the effect display area 208d. In this example, it is assumed that the result of determining whether or not the normal figure variation game is successful is that the stop symbol is a normal figure B (out of line). During the demonstration period, the execution of the electric Chu long opening effect is not regulated. The electric-chu-long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during a general-purpose variable game during non-temporary time (during non-electric support). It is an effect that tells whether or not to open for a long time (for example, about 5 seconds) and / or open several times (hereinafter sometimes referred to as long opening). It should be noted that, even after the normal fluctuation stop, the electric-chu-long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as “electric-chu-opening!”) May be continued based on the normal signal stop symbol.

  In this example, there is a deviation in the hit determination of the common figure variable game, but in the lottery process executed by the first sub-control unit 400, the special figure 2 starting port (electric Chu) 232 may be opened long. The electric-chu-long opening false effect 760 is executed in the electric-chu-long opening false effect area. As an electric Chu-long opening false effect 760, an image of a samurai character operating a lottery machine is displayed along with a display of “help chance lottery in progress”. A roaring effect that causes the player to expect that 232 may be released for a long time is being executed.

  The notice condition of the notice change notification (second display) of the result of the ordinary figure floating game by the electric-chu-long opening effect is that the alerting notice effect 750 (first display) is being executed and the special figure change game is not displayed. In addition to being in operation and being not in operation (maintaining the closed state) of the attacker 234, the execution of the electric-chu-long opening effect is not restricted, and the stop pattern of the usual figure variable game is shown in FIG. In the case of (missing), it is to win the execution of the electric tulong opening false effect.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (d), a part of the alerting notification effect 750 is hidden by the electric tulong opening false effect 760, making it difficult for the player to confirm the part. The alerting notification effect 750 includes a portion that overlaps the electric-chu-long opening effect region as the first display portion and a portion that does not overlap the electric-chu-long opening effect region as the second display portion. For this reason, even if the alerting notification effect 750 and the electric long open false effect 760 are simultaneously executed, at least a part of the alerting notification effect 750 can be recognized by the player. By causing the player to visually recognize at least a part of the alerting notification, the electric tulong opening false effect 760 can attract more attention of the player. In this way, by performing the effect of the alerting notification at a predetermined notification timing, while attracting the attention of the player by the alerting notification, by concealing the alerting notification with other alerts in a state of attracting attention, It is possible to make the player pay attention to other notifications.

  FIG. 40 (e) following FIG. 40 (d) shows a state in which the content of the alerting notification effect 750 is changed from “strategy” shown in FIG. 36 to “effect” during the demonstration effect period. Yes. In addition, the general map display device 210 stops the general map B and notifies that the general map variable game is out of play. In addition, the electric Chulong opening false effect 760 is displayed with the word “unfortunate” along with the indication of “help chance drawing”, and the special figure 2 starting port 232 is opened because the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out of place. Notify

  FIG. 40 (f) following FIG. 40 (e) shows a state where the content of the alerting notification effect 750 is changed from “production” shown in FIG. 36 to “inhibition of investment” during the demonstration production period. Yes. In the state shown in FIG. 40 (f), one of the four LEDs of the general-purpose hold lamp 216 is lit on the left side to notify that there is one general-purpose hold. In addition, a general map change game is executed on the general map display device 210.

  In FIG. 40 (g) following FIG. 40 (f), a user menu effect 770 in which the player presses the chance button 136 to display a menu image in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is executed. Indicates the state. Note that the general map display device 210 is executing a general map variable game. When the user menu effect 770 is started, the demonstration effect is stopped and the alerting notification effect 750 is also ended. By doing so, it is possible to hide the alert notification made during the demonstration production by an operation by the player. When the display of the user menu is started based on the fact that the player has operated the chance button 136, the demonstration effect that has been executed is canceled, so that the player who thinks that the alerting notification is unnecessary is required to perform the demonstration effect. Can be canceled arbitrarily.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a setting operation unit that can be operated by the player. For example, the setting operation unit is disposed in the vicinity of the chance button 136 of the door 108 with a ball storage tray. The setting operation unit is a push button type switch that can be pressed by a setting person (for example, a player or a game shop clerk), and a confirmation (OK) button, an upper button located above the confirmation button, and a lower part of the confirmation button. , A right button positioned to the right of the confirm button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. . In addition, the setting operation unit includes an operation unit sensor that detects pressing of each button. The setting operation unit of this example has a unit structure in which each button and the operation unit sensor are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. May be.

  In FIG. 40 (h) following FIG. 40 (g), the player operates the button of the setting operation unit to move the pointer to the “END” icon displayed in the menu image, thereby ending the user menu effect 770. The state which is going to be shown.

  FIG. 40 (i) following FIG. 40 (h) shows a state after the end of the user menu effect 770. The left two of the four LEDs of the usual figure hold lamp 216 are lit, and it is notified that there are two pending figures. In addition, the general map display device 210 continues to execute the general map variable game. The decorative symbol display device 208 returns to the display similar to the state shown in FIG. When a predetermined time has elapsed from the display of the state shown in FIG. 40 (i), the demonstration effect is executed again. The contents of the demonstration effect at this time may be started from the beginning or may be continuously executed from the interrupted position.

  FIG. 41 shows various states in a state in which a special figure variable game is executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a state in which a big hit game is executed, or a state in which neither a special figure variable game nor a big hit game is executed. Example 3-5 of the notification effect is shown.

  FIG. 41A shows a state where the user menu effect 770 is being executed. In the upper stage of the effect display area 208d, a title bar in which the character string “menu” is arranged in the center is displayed. On the left side of the screen, from top to bottom, there are six icons with “member registration”, “password input”, “barcode issuance”, “data clear”, “volume / light quantity adjustment”, and “end”. Are lined up. Of the six icons, “bar code issuance” and “data clear” can be selected after the password is input, and are displayed at low brightness indicating that selection is not possible at this time. On the right side of the six icons, a hand-shaped pointer indicating a selectable icon is arranged. In FIG. 41A, the pointer is positioned on the right side of the “password input” icon. A character image of “画面” is displayed on the right side of the screen, and a character string “Just select an item and make a decision” is displayed in a balloon, and an alert notification effect 772 regarding the operation explanation is given to the player. It is running.

  In FIG. 41 (b) following FIG. 41 (a), the player operates the button on the setting operation unit, positions the pointer on the “password input” icon displayed on the menu image, and confirms the setting operation unit. As a result of pressing the button, the password input screen is displayed in the effect display area 208d. In the upper part of the effect display area 208d, a title bar in which a character string “password input” is arranged in the center is displayed. An input area for inputting a 4-digit number is displayed on the left side of the screen. In the input area, “15” is already entered in the upper two digits. “**” indicating no input is displayed in the lower two digits. A numeric keypad is displayed on the right side of the screen, indicating that the pointer is at the position “5”.

  In FIG. 41 (c) following FIG. 41 (b), the player places the pointer on the “OK” icon on the numeric keypad and presses the confirm button on the setting operation unit. Is displayed.

FIG. 41 (d) following FIG. 41 (c) shows a state in which “bar code issue” and “data clear” have become high brightness and can be selected as a result of accepting the password input. In addition, a character image of “爺” is displayed on the right side of the screen, and a character string “Just select an item and make a decision” is displayed in a balloon. 772 is being executed. Also, a user level notification effect 775 is executed in the upper right corner of the effect display area 208d to notify that the player's current arrival level is 250 and the title in the game is “General”. The user level notification effect 775 is also a warning notification that causes the player to confirm the user level and to be aware that the user mode is being set. As shown in FIG. 41 (d), the user level notification effect 775 hides a part of the alert notification effect 772 related to the operation explanation, and the player cannot visually recognize a part of the alert notification effect 772. In this way, by performing the effect of the alerting notification at a predetermined notification timing, while attracting the attention of the player by the alerting notification, by concealing the alerting notification with other alerts in a state of attracting attention, It is possible to make the player pay attention to other notifications.
FIG. 41D shows a state in which the player operates the button of the setting operation unit to move the pointer to the “end” icon displayed on the menu image to end the user menu effect 770. Show.

  In FIG. 41 (e) following FIG. 41 (d), the player operates the button on the setting operation unit, positions the pointer on the “end” icon displayed on the menu image, and confirms the setting operation unit. As a result of pressing, a state transitioned from the user menu image is shown. In the effect display area 208d shown in FIG. 41 (e), a character image of “爺” is displayed together with the user level notification effect 775, and “Be careful not to forget to take the two-dimensional barcode at the end of the game” in the balloon. A character string "" is displayed, and a warning alerting effect 780 regarding the operation explanation is executed for the player. As shown in FIG. 41 (e), the user level notification effect 775 partially hides the alert notification effect 780 related to the operation explanation. This makes it difficult for the player to confirm a part of the alerting notification effect 780. In this way, while attracting the player's attention by the alerting notification, concealing the alerting notification by other alerts in a state where attention has been gathered, the player can be focused on other alerts. In addition, since the user mode is arbitrarily set by the player, it can be considered that the alerting notification effect 780 itself relating to the operation explanation for the player has been executed arbitrarily by the player. In the present embodiment, the alert notification effect 780 executed arbitrarily by the player is intentionally hidden by the user level notification effect 775.

  FIG. 41 (f) following FIG. 41 (e) shows a state in which a game ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 and a special figure 1 variable game has started. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the effect 780 for notifying the operation explanation is ended and hidden, and the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c are set in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thus, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The user level notification effect 775 is also executed during the special figure variable game, and also functions as a warning notification that alerts the player that the user mode is being set. The user level notification effect 775 is always executed while the user mode is set. The user level notification effect 775 allows the player to always receive a warning during the setting of the user mode that the user mode is being set and that the issue of the two-dimensional bar code should not be forgotten. it can.

  Note that it may be possible for the player to set whether or not to execute the alert notification, the execution timing, and the like. For example, the time may be set, and at least a part of the notification executed when an alarm function for notifying the player that the set time has been activated may be hidden by another notification.

  The user mode can be arbitrarily set by the player. During the user mode setting, a player may be given a profit different from the game profit. For example, special points are given, customizing functions are provided, special images and sounds can be selected, special titles are given, mission achievement lists can be viewed, games, etc. There is an advantage that cumulative data can be referred to. While the user mode is being set, the user level notification effect 775 that alerts the user mode to be set and the game data of this time will not be reflected unless a special operation is performed at the end of the user mode. A warning alerting effect 772 regarding the operation explanation is performed.

  Alert notification (for example, alert notification effect 772) regarding data that is very important for one player and not at all important for another player is provided by another alert (for example, user level notification effect 775). By inhibiting, it is possible to give different impressions depending on how the player perceives. Thus, when the other notification is performed, only a specific player can be focused on the other notification.

  Next, an example in which the visibility of display on the decorative symbol display device 208 changes will be described with reference to FIG. First, an example in which the visibility between the first display 790 and the second display 792 changes will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 42A, a first display 790 and a second display 792 are displayed with a predetermined interval. In this state, for example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, a second display 792 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the first display 790, as shown on the right side of FIG. Thus, by displaying the second display 792 on the front surface of the first display 790, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 is changed, and the first display 790 is changed to the second display 792. It may be less visible than the display 792 and the second display 792 may be easier to see than the first display 790. When the display is switched from the state shown on the left side of FIG. 42A to the state shown on the right side, the display may be switched step by step. For example, the first display 790 may move toward the second display 792 at the start of display switching. Accordingly, when the first display 790 is moving without overlapping the second display 792, the first display 790 is stopped while the first display 790 is stopped. It may be easier to see than the second display 792.

  Further, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 42A to the state shown on the left side. Thereby, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 can be changed. When the display is switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 42A to the state shown on the left side, the display may be switched step by step. For example, the first display 790 may gradually move away from the second display 792 at the start of display switching. Accordingly, when the first display 790 is moved so as to overlap the second display 792, the first display 790 that is moving is less visible than the second display 792 that is stopped. When the display 790 is moving without overlapping the second display 792, the moving first display 790 may be easier to see than the stopped second display 792.

  Further, as shown on the left side of FIG. 42B, the first display 790 is displayed on the front surface of the second display 792, and the first display 790 and the second display 792 are displayed in an overlapping manner. In such a case, for example, the display color of the second display 792 may be changed to be darker as shown on the right side of FIG. Thereby, when the display color of the second display 792 is changing, the second display 792 whose display color is changing is easier to see than the first display 790 where nothing is changing, After the change of the display color is completed, the second display 792 displayed on the back side of the first display 790 may be less visible than the first display 790.

  Further, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 42B to the state shown on the left side. Thus, when the display color of the second display 792 is changed so as to be thin while the first display 790 and the second display 792 are overlapped with each other, the second display 792 is superimposed on the front surface. In some cases, the first display 790 can be made easier to see and the second display 792 can be made harder to see.

  Further, as shown on the left side of FIG. 42C, a first display 790 and a second display 792 are displayed with a predetermined interval D1. In this state, for example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the interval between the first display 790 and the second display 792 becomes D2 (D1> D2) as shown on the right side of FIG. Become. Thereby, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be changed to make it difficult to distinguish the first display 790 and the second display 792.

  The display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 42C to the state shown on the left side. Thereby, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be changed to make it easy to distinguish the first display 790 and the second display 792.

  Also, when switching from the state shown on the left in FIG. 42C to the state shown on the right, or from the state shown on the right to the state shown on the left, the attention is paid to the moving display. Of the first display 790 and the second display 792, the display that is moved may be easier to see than the display that is not moved.

  42D, the first display 790 is displayed in front of the second display 792, and the first display 790 and the second display 792 are displayed so as to overlap each other. For example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, as shown on the right side of FIG. 42 (d), the front-rear relationship between the first display 790 and the second display 792 is reversed. The second display 792 may be displayed in front of the first display 790. In this way, the second display 792 displayed on the back surface of the first display 790 is displayed on the front surface of the first display 790 so that the second display 792 is easier to see than the first display 790. The first display 790 may be less visible than the second display 792.

  Further, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 42 (d) to the state shown on the left side. By displaying the first display 790 displayed on the back surface of the second display 792 on the front surface of the second display 792, the first display 790 is made easier to see than the second display 792, and the second display 792 is displayed. The display 792 may be less visible than the first display 790.

  Further, as shown on the left side of FIG. 42 (e), the first display 790 is displayed in front of the second display 792, and the first display 790 and the second display 792 are overlapped, When the first display 790 is displayed brighter than the second display 792, the first display 790 is displayed on the right side of FIG. The display color of the second display 792 may be changed. In this case, the first display 790 is displayed brighter than the second display 792 even after the display color is changed, so that the state in which the first display 790 is easier to see than the second display 792 can be maintained. There is a case.

  Further, the display of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be switched from the state shown on the right side of FIG. 42E to the state shown on the left side. As described above, the first display 790 is displayed brighter than the second display 792 even after the display color is changed to make both the first display 790 and the second display 792 bright. In some cases, it is possible to maintain a state that is easier to see than the second display 792.

  The first display 790 and the second display 792 include a decorative design, a hold icon, a variation icon, a presentation display such as a character image or a background image, an error display, an operation request notification display, a tutorial display, and the like. The first display 790 and the second display 792 may be a combination of different types of display (for example, error display and decorative symbol display), or the same type of display (for example, three decorative symbols). Or two of the hold icons). In addition, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be changed to change the visibility of at least a part or only a part of the first display 790 and the second display 792. . Thereby, one of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may be less visible (easy to see) than the other.

  As shown on the left side of FIG. 42 (f), when the background is white, the first display 790 displayed in light ink is less visible than the second display 792 displayed in dark gray. It has become. As described above, when the background is white, the first display 790 displayed in light ink color close to white is relatively difficult to see, and the second display 792 displayed in gray close to black. Becomes relatively easy to see.

  On the other hand, as shown on the right side of FIG. 42 (f), the display colors of the first display 790 and the second display 792 do not change from the state shown on the left side of FIG. When the color changes from white to black, the first display 790 displayed in a light ink color close to white is relatively easy to see, and the second display 792 displayed in a gray close to black is relatively It becomes difficult to see. As described above, even when the first display 790 and the second display 792 themselves do not change, the visibility of the first display 790 and the second display 792 may change due to the change of the background color. is there.

  FIGS. 42A to 42F show examples in which the visibility of the two displays, the first display 790 and the second display 792, changes. However, the display is not related to the change in visibility (for example, , A third indication) may be present. For example, when display A, display B, and display C are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, display A corresponds to the first display 790 and display B corresponds to the second display 792. May be. In this case, the visibility of the display C may be maintained while changing the visibility of the display A and the display B. Further, the display B may correspond to the first display 790, and the display C may correspond to the second display 792. In this case, the visibility of display A may be maintained while the visibility of display B and display C is changed. Further, the display C may correspond to the first display 790, and the display A may correspond to the second display 792. In this case, the visibility of display B may be maintained while changing the visibility of display C and display A.

  42A to 42F show an example in which the visibility of the two displays of the first display 790 and the second display 792 changes. However, there are three displays related to the change in visibility. There may be more than one. For example, display A and display B may correspond to the first display 790, and display C may correspond to the second display 792. In addition, the display B and the display C may correspond to the first display 790, and the display A may correspond to the second display 792. In addition, the display C and the display A may correspond to the first display 790, and the display B may correspond to the second display 792. In addition, the display A may correspond to the first display 790, and the display B and the display C may correspond to the second display 792. Further, the display B may correspond to the first display 790, and the displays A and C may correspond to the second display 792. Further, the display C may correspond to the first display 790, and the displays A and B may correspond to the second display 792. Thereby, the visibility of the three displays may be changed to allow the player to focus on the three displays.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 42 (g), the background color of the hold icon display area 794 displaying the hold icons a1 to a4 is different from other background colors, and the hold icon display area 794 clearly distinguishes. When the display shown in FIGS. 42A to 42E is switched in the hold icon display area 794, the visibility of the effect display changes in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In some cases, it is possible to keep the area to be held only within the hold icon display area 794.

  Next, an example in which the visibility of two displays changes depending on the brightness difference (contrast) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 shows a color chart when the gradation levels of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) are changed by 40 gradation levels between 0 gradation value and 255 gradation values. . In this example, an example will be described in which the gradation levels of a circular image and a square image displayed overlapping the circular image are changed. The circular image and the square image are displayed so that the center of the circle and the intersection of the diagonal lines of the square coincide with each other. Further, the diameter of the circle of the circular image is shorter than the length of one side of the square image. In addition, the circular image is displayed on a layer in front of the square image. Further, the transmittance of the circular image and the square image is 0%.

  In the color chart of FIG. 43, the R value, G value, and B value of a circular image are shown in the vertical direction, and the R value, G value, and B value of a square image are shown in the horizontal direction. In this example, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are made the same, and the gradation values of each color are changed to 0, 40, 80, 120, 160, 200, 240, and 255. Similarly, the R value, G value, and B value of the square image are made the same, and the gradation values of the respective colors are changed to 0, 40, 80, 120, 160, 200, 240, and 255.

  For example, as shown in the first row and first column of FIG. 43, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), and the R value, G value of the square image When the B value is 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), since the circular image and the square image are displayed in black, they cannot be recognized separately. 43, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), and the R value, G value of the square image are shown. When the B value is 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), the circular image and the square image are displayed in white, so that they cannot be distinguished and recognized. Thus, when the brightness difference between the circular image and the square image is small, the visibility of the circular image displayed in the square image is relatively low.

  On the other hand, as shown in the eighth row and first column of FIG. 43, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), and the R value, G value of the square image When the B value is 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), the circular image is displayed in white, and the square image is displayed in black. 43, the R value, G value, and B value of the circular image are 0 (RGB (0, 0, 0)), and the R value, G value of the square image are shown. When the B value is 255 (RGB (255, 255, 255)), the circular image is displayed in black, and the square image is displayed in white. Thus, when the brightness difference between the circular image and the square image is large, the visibility of the circular image displayed in the square image is relatively high.

  In this way, when two images are displayed in an overlapping manner, if the difference in brightness between the two images is the same or small, it becomes difficult to identify the two images and the visibility of the two images is also reduced. be able to. Further, if the brightness difference between the two images is increased, the two images can be easily identified and the visibility of the two images can be improved.

  In order to improve the visibility of the image by the player, the brightness difference (contrast difference) between the image displayed in the back layer and the image displayed in the front layer of the two images displayed in a superimposed manner It is effective to put on. Further, in order to improve the visibility of the player's display, a hue difference or a saturation difference may be given to the image displayed in the back layer and the image displayed in the front layer. However, even if the image displayed in the back layer and the image displayed in the previous layer are different in hue, the visibility of the two images decreases if the lightness and saturation are substantially the same. . For this reason, in order to improve the visibility of the two images, it is most effective to make a difference in brightness between the two images.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 43 again.

(1) The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment
A game machine provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means includes a first display (for example, lower pan full error display (ball removal notification) 704, attention alert notification effect 722, right-handed notification effect 724, attention alert notification effect 750, attention alert notification effect 772, first Display 790) at least.
The display means includes a second display (for example, an effect display, a tutorial display 709, a pre-reading notice notification effect 730, 740, an electric tulong open effect, an electric tulong open false effect 760, a user level notification effect 775, a second Display 792) can be displayed at least,
The display means displays a third display (for example, a ball shortage error display 706, a fourth symbol displayed in the fourth symbol display area 208e, and the number of special figures held in the special symbol hold number display area 208f). At least displayable,
At least a part of the first display has at least low visibility when the display means is in the first state,
The first state is a state where at least the second display is displayed on the display means,
At least a part of the third display has at least higher visibility than the first display when the display means is in the first state.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the visibility of the first display may be lowered, so that the player is focused on the display means in an attempt to recognize the notification content of the first display, and the player is concentrated on the game. May be possible. In addition, since the visibility of the first display displayed on the display means may be lowered, the player's line of sight may be able to be directed to the second display. Further, since the third display is easy to confirm even in the first state, it may be easy for the player to confirm the third display while viewing the second display.

The first display may be displayed at the first display position on the display means.
The second display may be displayed at the second display position on the display means.
The third display may be displayed at a third display position on the display means.
The third display position may be a position with higher visibility than the first display position when the display means is in the first state.
The first display position may be a position having lower visibility than the third display position when the display means is in the first state.
The first display position may be a position having lower visibility than the second display position when the display means is in the first state.
-A part or all of the third display may be at least higher in visibility than the first display when the display means is in the first state.

(2) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is a display related to a game,
The second display is an effect display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, since the display related to the game is difficult to see due to the effect display, the player may be able to pay attention to the effect display. Even if the effect display is displayed, the player can easily confirm the third display, and thus it may be easier to confirm the third display while viewing the effect display.

(3) The pachinko machine 100,
At least a part of the first display has at least higher visibility than the first state when the display means is in the second state,
The second state is a state in which the second display is not displayed at least on the display means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, in the second state, the visibility of the first display is higher than that in the first state, so that the first display is displayed in the first state. It may be easier for the player to guess that.

Part or all of the first display may be higher in visibility than the first state when the display means is in the second state.
Part or all of the first display may be more visible than one or more states including the first state when the display means is in the second state.
When the display means is in the second state, part or all of the first display has higher visibility than the first state and is different from the first state and the second state. The visibility may be lower than the state.
The second state may be a state where one or more displays including the second display are not displayed on the display means.
The second state may be a state in which only the second display is not displayed on the display means.

(4) The pachinko machine 100,
The second display is displayed at least in front of the first display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, since the second display is displayed on the front side of the first display in the first state, it may be possible to make the second display easy to attract the player. . In the first state, since the first display is displayed behind the second display, the player may be able to carefully watch the first display.

The second display may be displayed in front of the first display.
The second display may be displayed in front of one or more displays including the first display.
The second display may be displayed on the front side of the first display and may be displayed on the back side of one or more displays other than the first display.

(5) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display is an error display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, in the first state, by reducing the visibility of the error display, the player is encouraged to recognize the notification content of the error display, and the error display is carefully viewed by the player. There is a case that can be made. Moreover, since the visibility of the second display is higher than the error display, it may be possible to prevent the player from overlooking the second display. Also, it may be possible to make it easier to confirm the third display even when an error is displayed.

(6) The pachinko machine 100,
The first display includes at least information more important to the player than the second display,
The third display includes at least information that is more important to the player than the second display.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, the visibility of a part of the first display including information that is highly important for the player is hidden and reduced by a part of the effect display, so that the line of sight of the game is directed to the display means. There are cases where it is possible. In addition, since the third display having high importance for the player can be easily confirmed even in the first state, the player may be able to play the game with peace of mind.

The first display may be a display including only information that is more important to the player than the second display.
The first display may be a display including only a plurality of pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display.
The first display includes one or more pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more pieces of information that are less important than the second display (for example, a character image or background) ) May be included.
The first display includes one or more information items that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more information items that are less important than one or more displays different from the second display (e.g., Display including a character image and background).
The third display may be a display that includes only information that is more important to the player than the second display.
The third display may be a display that includes only a plurality of pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display.
The third display includes one or more pieces of information that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more pieces of information that are less important than the second display (for example, a character image or background) ) May be included.
The third display includes one or more information items that are more important to the player than the second display and one or more information items that are less important than one or more displays different from the second display (e.g., Display including a character image and background).

(7) The pachinko machine 100,
Operating means (for example, ball discharge lever 132, chance button 136) provided at least at a position where the player can operate,
The first display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means.
It is characterized by that.

  According to this configuration, at least a part of the notification that prompts the operation of the operation means is hidden by the effect display, and the visibility of at least a part of the notification is reduced, so that the player can concentrate on the effect display and play the game. You may be able to entertain. In addition, it may be possible to make it easier to confirm the third display while concentrating the player on the effect display.

  The above-mentioned “position having at least higher visibility than the first display” means a position where the player can always confirm at least the third display when the second display is displayed. Thus, even if the first display is hidden by the second display and the visibility of the second display is low, the third display can always be confirmed by the player. May be difficult to miss.

The above “information highly important for a player” may include at least information related to payout of a game ball (for example, an error related to ball removal notification or payout means). Thereby, it may be possible to prevent the player from missing information related to the profit of the game.
In addition, the above-mentioned “information that is highly important to the player” is information related to the progress of the game (for example, the fourth symbol (indicating that it is changing), the decorative symbol change display, the hold icon, the hitting notification. (Right-handed notification, notification of “turn steering wheel to the left”, etc.) may be included.
Further, the “information that is highly important for the player” may include at least information related to an abnormality of the pachinko machine 100 (such as an abnormality in the connection of the board and an abnormality in the position detection of the effect movable body).
In addition, the above-mentioned “information highly important for the player” may include at least information related to fraud (radio wave sensor error, magnetic sensor error, etc.).

The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include first display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208).
The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may include second display means (for example, a sub display device 808).
The “display unit” may be a display unit of at least one of the first display unit and the second display unit.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be provided with two types of hit symbols. For example, if one winning symbol is won, even if it is non-electric support, the wing member 232a opens so that four game balls can enter the special figure 2 starting port 232, and if the other winning symbol is won, the non-electric support The blade member 232a may be opened to the extent that a game ball cannot enter the special figure 2 starting port 232. In the case where the other winning symbol is won during non-electric support, the same effect as in the case of shifting in the usual figure variable game may be executed in the electric Chu long opening effect.

  The embodiment and various modifications described above can be implemented in combination with each other.

  In the present invention, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a slot machine, an arrangement ball game machine, a sparrow ball game machine, a smart ball, and a predetermined number of game balls are used in a circulating manner. The present invention may be applied to an enclosed game machine (for example, an enclosed pachinko machine). The applicable pachinko machine of the present invention may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball. And the ball payout may be executed by credit.

The game table according to the above embodiment is expressed as follows, for example.
(Appendix 2-1)
A first display means;
A second display means;
A game machine equipped with
The first display means is capable of displaying at least a first display,
The second display means is capable of displaying at least a second display,
At least a part of the first display has at least low visibility when the second display means is in the first state,
The first state is a state where at least the second display is displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-2)
A gaming machine according to appendix 2-1,
The first display is a display related to a game,
The second display is an effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-3)
A game machine according to appendix 2-1 or 2-2,
At least a part of the first display has at least higher visibility than the first state when the second display means is in the second state,
The second state is a state in which the second display is not displayed at least on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-3,
The first region is provided at least in a position overlapping at least with the second region in the first state,
The first region is at least a part of the first display means,
The second region is at least a part of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-4,
The first display is an error display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-5,
The second display means is provided at least on the front side of the first display means,
The second display is displayed at least in front of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-6,
The first display means is provided with at least a first display area,
The second display means is provided with at least a second display area,
The first display area can display at least the first display,
The second display area can display at least the second display,
The third display area is provided at least in a position overlapping the fourth display area in the first state,
The third display area is at least a part of the first display area,
The fourth display area is at least a part of the second display area.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-7,
The first display includes at least information more important to the player than the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-9)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-8,
Comprising at least operating means provided at a position operable by the player;
The first display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-10)
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
Movable means movable from a first position to a second position;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is image display means,
The movable means is a movable means for production,
One of the plural types of displays is a dish full tank error display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
The second position is a position where the movable means is located in front of the display means,
The second position is a position where the movable means overlaps at least a part of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-11)
A gaming machine according to appendix 2-10,
It has a storage tray that can store game balls,
The first display is a display prompting to discharge the game ball from the storage tray.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-12)
A gaming machine according to appendix 2-10 or 2-11,
The first position is a position where the movable means does not overlap the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 2-10 to 2-12,
The first position is a position where the movable means is located in front of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-14)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-10 to 2-13,
The visibility of the first display is lower when the movable means is located at the second position than when the movable means is located at the first position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-15)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 2-10 to 2-14,
The movable means is means capable of moving from the second position to the first position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-16)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-10 to 2-15,
The movable means is means capable of moving from the first position to the third position via the second position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-17)
A gaming machine according to appendix 2-16,
The third position is a position where the movable means is located in front of the display means,
The third position is a position where the movable means overlaps at least a part of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-18)
A gaming machine according to appendix 2-16,
The third position is a position where the movable means is located in front of the display means,
The third position is a position where the movable means does not overlap with the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-19)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 2-10 to 2-18,
The movable means is means provided to be movable in front of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-20)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 2-10 to 2-19,
The movable means is means capable of moving to the second position even when the first display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-21)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-10 to 2-20,
The movable means is means capable of moving to the second position even when the first display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 2-10 to 2-21,
The first display is a display corresponding to one of a plurality of types of errors.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-23)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 2-10 to 2-22,
One of the plurality of types of display is an effect display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”).
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-24)
A gaming machine according to appendix 2-23,
The second display is a display of a hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-25)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 2-10 to 2-24,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-26)
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
Movable means movable from a first position to a second position;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is image display means,
The movable means is a movable means for production,
One of the plural types of displays is a dish full tank error display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
One of the plurality of types of display is an effect display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),
At least a part of the first display is a display that overlaps at least a part of the second display,
The first display is a display displayed in front of the second display,
The second position is a position where the movable means is located in front of the display means,
The second position is a position where the movable means overlaps at least a part of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-27)
An amusement machine according to appendix 2-26,
It has a storage tray that can store game balls,
The first display is a display prompting to discharge the game ball from the storage tray.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-28)
A game machine according to appendix 2-26 or 2-27,
The first position is a position where the movable means does not overlap the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-29)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 2-26 to 2-28,
The first position is a position where the movable means is located in front of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-30)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-26 to 2-29,
The visibility of the first display is lower when the movable means is located at the second position than when the movable means is located at the first position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-31)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 2-26 to 2-30,
The movable means is means capable of moving from the second position to the first position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-32)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-26 to 2-31,
The movable means is means capable of moving from the first position to the third position via the second position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-33)
A gaming machine according to appendix 2-32,
The third position is a position where the movable means is located in front of the display means,
The third position is a position where the movable means overlaps at least a part of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-34)
A gaming machine according to appendix 2-32,
The third position is a position where the movable means is located in front of the display means,
The third position is a position where the movable means does not overlap with the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-35)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-26 to 2-34,
The movable means is means provided to be movable in front of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-36)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-26 to 2-35,
The movable means is means capable of moving to the second position even when the first display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-37)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-26 to 2-36,
The movable means is means capable of moving to the second position even when the first display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-38)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-26 to 2-37,
The first display is a display corresponding to one of a plurality of types of errors.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-39)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 2-26 to 2-38,
Provided with operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-40)
A game machine according to appendix 2-39,
The movable means is configured to move from the first position to the second position in response to the operation means being operated.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-41)
The game stand according to appendix 2-39 or 2-40,
The second display is a display that can be displayed after the operation means is operated.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-42)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 2-26 to 2-40,
The second display is a display of a hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-43)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 2-26 to 2-40,
The second display is a background display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-44)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-26 to 2-43,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-45)
Display means;
Movable means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a dish full tank error display,
The movable means is a means movable to a second position;
The second position is a position in front of the display means;
A portion of the movable means located in the second position overlaps at least a portion of the dish full tank error display;
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-46)
An amusement machine according to appendix 2-45,
It has a storage tray that can store game balls,
The dish full tank error display is a display prompting to discharge the game ball from the storage dish,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-47)
A gaming machine according to appendix 2-45 or 2-46,
The movable means is means capable of moving from a first position to the second position;
The movable means located at the first position does not overlap with the dish full tank error display;
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-48)
An amusement machine according to appendix 2-47,
The first position is a position in front of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-49)
A gaming machine according to appendix 2-47 or 4-48,
When the movable means is located at the second position, the visibility of the dish full tank error display is lower than when the movable means is located at the first position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-50)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-47 to 2-49,
The movable means is means capable of moving from the second position to the first position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-51)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-47 to 2-50,
The movable means is means capable of moving to the second position even when the dish full tank error display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-52)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-47 to 2-51,
The movable means is means capable of moving to the second position even when the dish full tank error display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-53)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-47 to 2-52,
Provided with operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-54)
A gaming machine according to attachment 2-53,
The movable means is configured to move from the first position to the second position in response to the operation means being operated.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-55)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-47 to 2-54,
The movable means is means capable of moving from the first position to the third position via the second position.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-56)
An amusement machine according to appendix 2-55,
The third position is a position in front of the display means;
The movable means located in the third position overlaps at least a portion of the dish full tank error indication;
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-57)
An amusement machine according to appendix 2-55,
The third position is a position in front of the display means;
The movable means located at the third position does not overlap the dish full tank error display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-58)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-45 to 2-57,
The movable means is means provided to be movable in front of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-59)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-45 to 2-58,
The dish full tank error display is a display corresponding to one of a plurality of types of errors.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-60)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-45 to 2-59,
One of the plurality of types of display is an effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-61)
A game machine according to appendix 2-60,
The effect display is a display of a hold icon,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-62)
A game machine according to appendix 2-60,
The effect display is a background display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-63)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-45 to 2-62,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-64)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 2-45 to 2-62,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

The game table according to the above embodiment is expressed as follows, for example.
(Appendix 3-1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is capable of displaying at least a first display,
The display means is capable of displaying at least a second display,
The display means is capable of displaying at least a third display;
At least a part of the first display has at least low visibility when the display means is in the first state,
The first state is a state where at least the second display is displayed on the display means,
At least a part of the third display has at least higher visibility than the first display when the display means is in the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-2)
A gaming machine according to appendix 3-1,
The first display is a display related to a game,
The second display is an effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-3)
A gaming machine according to appendix 3-1 or 3-2,
At least a part of the first display has at least higher visibility than the first state when the display means is in the second state,
The second state is a state in which the second display is not displayed at least on the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-4)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-1 to 3-3,
The second display is displayed at least in front of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-1 to 3-4,
The first display is an error display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-6)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-1 to 3-5,
The first display includes at least information more important to the player than the second display,
The third display includes at least information that is more important to the player than the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-1 to 3-6,
Comprising at least operating means provided at a position operable by the player;
The first display includes at least a notification that prompts the player to operate the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

100 Pachinko machine 208 Decorative symbol display devices 208a to 208c Symbol display region 208d Effect display region 208e Fourth symbol display region 208f Special figure hold number display region 212 Special figure 1 display device 214 Special figure 2 display device 300 Main control unit 400 First Sub control unit 500 Second sub control unit 806 Production movable body 808 Sub display device 812 Light guide plate

Claims (20)

Display means;
Movable means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a dish full tank error display,
The movable means is a means movable to a second position;
The second position is a position in front of the display means;
A portion of the movable means located in the second position overlaps at least a portion of the dish full tank error display;
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
It has a storage tray that can store game balls,
The dish full tank error display is a display prompting to discharge the game ball from the storage dish,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
The movable means is means capable of moving from a first position to the second position;
The movable means located at the first position does not overlap with the dish full tank error display;
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3,
The first position is a position in front of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3 or 4,
When the movable means is located at the second position, the visibility of the dish full tank error display is lower than when the movable means is located at the first position.
A game stand characterized by that. A game table according to any one of claims 3 to 5,
The movable means is means capable of moving from the second position to the first position.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 3 to 6,
The movable means is means capable of moving to the second position even when the dish full tank error display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 3 to 7,
The movable means is means capable of moving to the second position even when the dish full tank error display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 3 thru | or 8,
Provided with operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 9,
The movable means is configured to move from the first position to the second position in response to the operation means being operated.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 3 thru | or 10,
The movable means is means capable of moving from the first position to the third position via the second position.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 11,
The third position is a position in front of the display means;
The movable means located in the third position overlaps at least a portion of the dish full tank error indication;
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 11,
The third position is a position in front of the display means;
The movable means located at the third position does not overlap the dish full tank error display,
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 13,
The movable means is means provided to be movable in front of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 14,
The dish full tank error display is a display corresponding to one of a plurality of types of errors.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 15,
One of the plurality of types of display is an effect display.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 16, wherein
The effect display is a display of a hold icon,
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 16, wherein
The effect display is a background display.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 18,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 18,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

Images